ZyXEL Communications P8802T Wireless N VDSL2 VoIP IAD With USB User Manual Book

ZyXEL Communications Corporation Wireless N VDSL2 VoIP IAD With USB Book

User Manual

www.zyxel.comwww.zyxel.comBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802TWireless N VDSL2 GW with USB Copyright © 2012 ZyXEL Communications CorporationVersion 1.00Edit ion 1, 7/ 2012Default Login DetailsLAN I P Address ht tp: / / 192.168.1.1: 8000Trusted I P Address for t he Device Access192.168.1.252User Nam e Adm inistrat orPassword Te1ef6n1c4
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide2IMPORTANT!READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USE.KEEP THIS GUIDE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE.Note:  This guide is a reference for a series of product s. Ther efore som e features or opt ions in this guide m ay not be available in your product .Graphics in t his book m ay differ slightly from  t he product due to differences in operating syst em s, operating syst em  versions, or if you inst alled updat ed software for your device. Every effor t has been m ade to ensure that t he inform ation in this m anual is accurat e.Related Documentation• Quick Start Guide The Quick St art Guide helps you get up and running right  away. I t  contains inform at ion on sett ing up your network and configuring for I nt ernet access.
  Table of ContentsBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 3Table of ContentsPart I: User’s Guide ......................................................................................... 11Chapter   1Introducing the VDSL Router ............................................................................................................131.1 Overview  ...........................................................................................................................................131.2 How to Manage the VDSL Router .....................................................................................................131.3 Good Habits for Managing the VDSL Router  ....................................................................................131.4 Power On/Off the VDSL Router  ........................................................................................................141.5 LEDs (Lights)  ....................................................................................................................................141.6 3G WAN  ............................................................................................................................................161.7 The RESET Button ............................................................................................................................161.8 Wireless Access ................................................................................................................................171.8.1 Using the Wifi Button  ...............................................................................................................17Chapter   2User Setup Guide................................................................................................................................192.1 Access the VDSL Router Configuration  ............................................................................................192.2 Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network  .............................................................................................202.2.1 Configuring the Wireless Network Settings  .............................................................................202.2.2 Using WPS  ..............................................................................................................................222.2.3 Without WPS  ...........................................................................................................................262.3 Using Wireless MAC Authentication to Block a Computer’s Access to the Wireless Network ..........282.4 Setting Up a NAT Virtual Server for a Game Server  .........................................................................292.5 Access Your Home Computer from the Internet Using DDNS  ..........................................................302.5.1 Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org ..................................................................312.5.2 Configuring DDNS on Your VDSL Router ................................................................................312.5.3 Configuring Port Forwarding on your VDSL Router  ................................................................322.5.4 Testing the DDNS Setting ........................................................................................................332.6 Configuring the Firewall  ....................................................................................................................342.6.1 Interface Default Policy ............................................................................................................342.6.2 Firewall Rules  ..........................................................................................................................342.7 LAN DHCP for IP Addressing Assignment ........................................................................................362.7.1 Configuring Static DHCP  .........................................................................................................372.8 Checking the Software Version  .........................................................................................................382.9 Restoring to Factory Default .............................................................................................................392.10 How to Use File Sharing on the VDSL Router  ................................................................................402.10.1 Set Up File Sharing  ...............................................................................................................402.10.2 Access Your Shared Files From a Computer  ........................................................................42
Table of ContentsBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide42.11  Using the Media Server Feature  ....................................................................................................432.11.1 Configuring the VDSL Router  ................................................................................................432.11.2 Using Windows Media Player  ................................................................................................432.11.3 Using a Digital Media Adapter  ...............................................................................................462.12 How to Share a USB Printer via Your VDSL Router  .......................................................................472.12.1 Add a New Printer Using Windows ........................................................................................482.12.2 Add a New Printer Using Macintosh OS X  ............................................................................52Part II: Technical Reference............................................................................ 59Chapter   3Device Info Screens............................................................................................................................613.1 Overview  ...........................................................................................................................................613.2 The Device Info Summary Screen  ....................................................................................................613.3 The WAN Info Screen  .......................................................................................................................633.4 The 3G Status Screen .......................................................................................................................643.5 The LAN Statistics Screen  ................................................................................................................653.6 The WAN Statistics Screen  ...............................................................................................................663.7 The xTM Statistics Screen  ................................................................................................................673.8 The xDSL Statistics Screen ...............................................................................................................683.8.1 The ADSL BER Test Screen ....................................................................................................713.9 The Route Info Screen ......................................................................................................................713.10 The ARP Info Screen  ......................................................................................................................723.11 The DHCP Leases Screen  ..............................................................................................................73Chapter   4WAN .....................................................................................................................................................754.1 Overview  ...........................................................................................................................................754.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ............................................................................................754.1.2 What You Need to Know ..........................................................................................................764.1.3 Before You Begin .....................................................................................................................784.2 The Layer-2 Interface ATM Screen  ...................................................................................................784.2.1 Layer-2 ATM Interface Configuration .......................................................................................794.3 The Layer-2 Interface PTM Screen ...................................................................................................814.3.1 Layer-2 PTM Interface Configuration ......................................................................................824.4 The WAN Service Screen  .................................................................................................................834.4.1 WAN Connection Configuration ...............................................................................................854.5 The 3G Backup Screen .....................................................................................................................974.6 Technical Reference ..........................................................................................................................99Chapter   5LAN Setup .........................................................................................................................................105
  Table of ContentsBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 55.1 Overview  .........................................................................................................................................1055.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..........................................................................................1055.1.2 What You Need To Know .......................................................................................................1065.1.3 Before You Begin ...................................................................................................................1065.2 The LAN Setup Screen  ...................................................................................................................1065.2.1 Add DHCP Static IP Lease Screen ........................................................................................1085.3 The IPv6 LAN Auto Configuration Screen .......................................................................................1095.4 Technical Reference ........................................................................................................................ 1115.4.1 LANs, WANs and the VDSL Router ....................................................................................... 1125.4.2 DHCP Setup  .......................................................................................................................... 1125.4.3 DNS Server Addresses  ......................................................................................................... 1125.4.4 LAN TCP/IP  ........................................................................................................................... 113Chapter   6Network Address Translation (NAT)................................................................................................ 1156.1 Overview   ........................................................................................................................................ 1156.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..........................................................................................1156.2 What You Need to Know  ................................................................................................................. 1156.3 The Virtual Servers Screen  ............................................................................................................. 1156.3.1 The Virtual Servers Add Screen   ........................................................................................... 1166.4 The DMZ Host Screen  .................................................................................................................... 1186.5 Technical Reference ........................................................................................................................ 119Chapter   7Firewall ..............................................................................................................................................1217.1 Overview   ........................................................................................................................................1217.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..........................................................................................1217.2 The Firewall General Screen   .........................................................................................................1217.2.1 Default Policy Configuration  ..................................................................................................1227.3 The Firewall Rules Screen  ..............................................................................................................1237.3.1 Firewall Rules Configuration   ................................................................................................125Chapter   8Quality of Service (QoS)...................................................................................................................1278.1 Overview   ........................................................................................................................................1278.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..........................................................................................1278.2 What You Need to Know  .................................................................................................................1278.3 The QoS Screen   ............................................................................................................................1298.4 The QoS Queue Setup Screen  .......................................................................................................1298.4.1 Adding a QoS Queue   ...........................................................................................................1318.5 The QoS Classification Setup Screen .............................................................................................1328.5.1 Add QoS Classification Rule   ................................................................................................1338.6 Technical Reference ........................................................................................................................136
Table of ContentsBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide6Chapter   9Routing ..............................................................................................................................................1399.1 Overview   ........................................................................................................................................1399.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..........................................................................................1399.2 The Default Gateway Screen  ..........................................................................................................1409.3 The Static Route Screen  .................................................................................................................1409.3.1 Add Static Route ....................................................................................................................1419.4 The Policy Routing Screen ..............................................................................................................1429.4.1 Add Policy Routing  ................................................................................................................1429.5 The RIP Screen ...............................................................................................................................143Chapter   10DNS Setup .........................................................................................................................................14510.1 Overview  .......................................................................................................................................14510.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................14510.1.2 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................14610.2 The DNS Server Screen  ...............................................................................................................14610.3 The Dynamic DNS Screen ............................................................................................................14710.3.1 The Dynamic DNS Add Screen ...........................................................................................148Chapter   11UPnP ..................................................................................................................................................15111.1 Overview  .......................................................................................................................................15111.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter  ........................................................................................15111.1.2 What You Need To Know  .....................................................................................................15111.2 The UPnP Screen  .........................................................................................................................15211.3 Installing UPnP in Windows XP Example ......................................................................................15211.4 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example ...........................................................................................154Chapter   12USB Services ....................................................................................................................................16112.1 Overview  .......................................................................................................................................16112.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................16112.1.2 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................16112.2 The File Sharing Screen  ...............................................................................................................16212.2.1 Before You Begin .................................................................................................................16312.2.2 Add New File Sharing User .................................................................................................16412.3 The Printer Server Screen  ............................................................................................................16512.3.1 Before You Begin .................................................................................................................16512.4 The Media Server Screen  .............................................................................................................166Chapter   13Certificates ........................................................................................................................................169
  Table of ContentsBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 713.1 Overview  .......................................................................................................................................16913.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................16913.2 What You Need to Know  ...............................................................................................................16913.3 The Local Certificates Screen .......................................................................................................16913.3.1 Create Certificate Request   .................................................................................................17013.3.2 Load Signed Certificate   ......................................................................................................17213.4 The Trusted CA Screen ................................................................................................................17313.4.1 View Trusted CA Certificate .................................................................................................17413.4.2 Import Trusted CA Certificate  ..............................................................................................175Chapter   14Wireless .............................................................................................................................................17714.1 Overview  .......................................................................................................................................17714.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................17714.1.2 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................17814.2 The Basic Screen  .........................................................................................................................17814.3 Wireless Security  ..........................................................................................................................17914.4 MAC Filter  .....................................................................................................................................18314.4.1 The MAC Filter Add Screen      ............................................................................................18414.5 The Advanced Screen ...................................................................................................................18414.6 Wireless Station Info .....................................................................................................................18614.7 Technical Reference ......................................................................................................................18614.7.1 Wireless Network Overview .................................................................................................18614.7.2 Additional Wireless Terms ...................................................................................................18814.7.3 Wireless Security Overview .................................................................................................18814.7.4 Signal Problems  ..................................................................................................................19114.7.5 BSS  .....................................................................................................................................19114.7.6 Preamble Type  ....................................................................................................................19214.7.7 WiFi Protected Setup (WPS)  ...............................................................................................19214.7.8 Vista as a WPS External Registrar ......................................................................................198Chapter  15Voice ..................................................................................................................................................20115.1 Overview  .......................................................................................................................................20115.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................20115.1.2 What You Need to Know About VoIP ...................................................................................20215.2 Before You Begin  ..........................................................................................................................20315.3 The SIP Settings Screen  ..............................................................................................................20315.4 The SIP Service Provider Screen   ................................................................................................20915.4.1 Dial Plan Rules  ....................................................................................................................21515.5 The Phone Region Screen  ...........................................................................................................21615.6 The Call Rule Screen ....................................................................................................................21715.7 Call History Summary Screen  .......................................................................................................219
Table of ContentsBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide815.8 Outgoing Calls Screen  ..................................................................................................................21915.9 Incoming Calls Screen  ..................................................................................................................22015.10 Technical Reference ....................................................................................................................22115.10.1 Quality of Service (QoS) ....................................................................................................23015.10.2 Phone Services Overview  .................................................................................................231Chapter   16Diagnostic .........................................................................................................................................23716.1 Overview  .......................................................................................................................................23716.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................23716.2 What You Need to Know  ...............................................................................................................23716.3 Diagnostics  ...................................................................................................................................23816.4 802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management ......................................................................................238Chapter   17Settings..............................................................................................................................................24117.1 Backup Configuration Using the Web Configurator ......................................................................24117.2 Restore Configuration Using the Web Configurator ......................................................................24117.3 Restoring Factory Defaults ............................................................................................................242Chapter   18Log ....................................................................................................................................................24518.1 Overview  .......................................................................................................................................24518.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................24518.1.2 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................24518.2 The System Log Screen ................................................................................................................24618.3 The System Log Configuration Screen  .........................................................................................246Chapter   19TR-069 Client.....................................................................................................................................24919.1 Overview  .......................................................................................................................................24919.2 The TR-069 Client Screen ............................................................................................................249Chapter   20Internet Time .....................................................................................................................................25320.1 The Internet  Time Screen   ...........................................................................................................253Chapter   21Access Control .................................................................................................................................25521.1 Overview   ......................................................................................................................................25521.2 The Access Control Screen  ..........................................................................................................255Chapter   22Software Upgrade .............................................................................................................................257
  Table of ContentsBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 922.1 Overview  .......................................................................................................................................25722.2 The Update Software Screen ........................................................................................................257Chapter   23Reboot ...............................................................................................................................................25923.1 Restart Using the Web Configurator  .............................................................................................259Chapter   24Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................26124.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs ....................................................................................26124.2 VDSL Router Access and Login ....................................................................................................26224.3 Internet Access  .............................................................................................................................26424.4 Wireless Internet Access ...............................................................................................................26524.5 USB Device Connection ................................................................................................................26624.6 UPnP .............................................................................................................................................266Appendix   A  Legal Information..........................................................................................................269Index ..................................................................................................................................................273
Table of ContentsBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide10
11PART IUser’s Guide
12
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 13CHAPTER   1Introducing the VDSL Router1.1  OverviewThe P8802T is a VDSL2 router and 100/ 10 Mb Et hernet  gat eway wit h a four-port built-in Et hernet swit ch and I EEE 802.11n wireless. The VDSL Rout er allows wired and wireless client s to safely access the I nternet. The built-in firewall blocks unaut horized access to your network.Only use firmware for your VDSL Router’s specific model. Refer to the label on the bottom of your VDSL Router.The VDSL Rout er has a USB port  for sharing files via a USB st orage device, sharing a USB print er, or  a 3G dongle for a backup connect ion. 1.2  How to Manage the VDSL RouterUse t he Web Configurat or to m anage t he VDSL Router using a (supported)  web browser.1.3  Good Habits for Managing the VDSL RouterDo the following things regularly to m ake t he VDSL Router m ore secure and t o m anage t he VDSL Router m ore effect ively.• Change t he password. Use a password t hat ’s not  easy t o guess and that consist s of different types of charact ers, such as num bers and lett ers.• Writ e down the password and put it  in a safe place.
Chapter 1 Introducing the VDSL RouterBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide141.4  Power On/Off the VDSL RouterUse t he Pow e r On/ Off butt on at t he left  side of the device when you face t o t he front  panel to t urn the VDSL Router on or off.1.5  LEDs (Lights)The following graphic displays t he labels of t he LEDs. Figure 1   LEDs on t he DeviceNone of t he LEDs are on if t he VDSL Router is not  receiving power.Table 1   LED DescriptionsLED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTIONPower Green On The VDSL Rout er is receiving power  and ready for use.Blinking The VDSL Router is self- test ing.Red On The VDSL Router det ected an err or while self-t est ing, or t here is a device m alfunct ion.Off The VDSL Rout er is not  receiving power.Blinking Fir m ware upgrade is in progr ess.3 G
 Chapter 1 Introducing the VDSL RouterBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 15Phone 1/ 2Green On A SI P account is regist ered for the phone port .Blinking A t elephone connect ed to the phone port  has its receiver off of the hook or there is an incom ing call.Orange On A SI P account is regist ered for the phone port and t here is a voice message in the corresponding SI P account .Blinking A t elephone connect ed to the phone port  has its receiver off of the hook and there is a voice m essage in the corresponding SI P account .Off The phone port does not  have a SI P account regist ered.Ethernet 1- 4Green On The VDSL Rout er has a successful 100 Mbps Et hernet  connection wit h a device on t he Local Area Net wor k ( LAN) . Blinking  The VDSL Router is sending or r eceiving data to/ from  t he LAN at  100 Mbps.Off The VDSL Router does not  have an Ethernet  connect ion with the LAN.DSL Green On The DSL line is up.Blinking The VDSL Rout er is initializing t he DSL line.Off The DSL line is down.I nternet Green On The VDSL Router has an I P connect ion but  no t raffic.Your device has a WAN I P address (eit her st atic or assigned by a DHCP server) , PPP negot iation was successfully com plet ed (if used)  and the DSL connect ion is up.Blinking The VDSL Router is sending or  receiving I P traffic.Off There is no I nternet  connect ion or the gat eway is in bridged mode.Red On The VDSL Rout er at tem pted to m ake an I P connect ion but failed. Possible causes are no response from  a DHCP server, no PPPoE response, PPPoE aut henticat ion failed.3G Green On The 3G backup connect ion t hr ough a 3G USB dongle is connect ed.Blinking The VDSL Router is negotiat ing a backup connect ion t hr ough a 3G dongle or sending or  r eceiving traffic through t he backup connection.Fast  Blinking The VDSL Rout er is sending or receiving traffic through t he backup connection.Red On Aut henticat ion of t he 3G backup connect ion t hrough a 3G USB dongle failed.Off The VDSL Router is using t he broadband interface.Wifi Green On The wireless net work is act ivat ed.Blinking The VDSL Rout er is com m unicat ing w it h ot her wireless client s.Orange Blinking The VDSL Router is set ting up a WPS connect ion.Off The wireless net work is not act ivated.Table 1   LED Descriptions ( continued)LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION
Chapter 1 Introducing the VDSL RouterBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide161.6  3G WAN The USB port ( at the right  side of the device when you face to the front panel) allows you to wirelessly connect to a 3G netowk t o get  I nt ernet  access by at taching a 3G dongle. You m ust  leave the VDSL Router DSL or Ethernet  WAN port  unconnect ed and at t ached a 3G dongle to use 3G as your WAN. You can also heve t he VDSL Router use t he 3G WAN connection as a backup. That m eans t he VDSL Router switches t o the 3G wireless WAN connection after the wired DSL or Ethernet WAN connect ion fails. The VDSL Rout er autom at ically changes back to use t he wired DSL or Ethernet WAN connect ion when it  is available.Figure 2   Internet Access Application: 3G WAN 1.7  The RESET ButtonI f you forget  your passw ord or cannot  access the web configurat or, you will need to use t he RESET butt on at  t he back of the device to reload t he fact ory- default configurat ion file. This deletes all your  and the passwor d w ill be reset  t o “ 1234”. 1Make sure t he Pow e r LED is green and on ( not blinking and not red or flashing r ed).2To set t he device back to the factory default sett ings, press t he RESET but t on for  ten seconds or  until t he Pow e r  LED begins t o blink and t hen release it. When the Pow er  LED begins to blink, t he defaults have been rest ored and the device rest arts.Note:  The default usernam e and password are on the label on the bottom  of the Device.
 Chapter 1 Introducing the VDSL RouterBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 171.8  Wireless AccessThe VDSL Router is a wireless Access Point ( AP)  for wireless clients, such as not ebook com put ers, sm artphones, or t ablet s. I t  allows them  t o connect  to the I nt er net  without  having to rely on inconvenient  Ethernet cables.You can connect  to your wireless net work using the W ifi but t on, wit hout having to access the Web Configurat or.Figure 3   Wireless Access Exam ple1.8.1  Using the Wifi ButtonNote:  The wireless client  m ust  be a WPS- aware device (for exam ple, a WPS USB adapt er or PCMCI A card), which can be ident ified by t he WPS logo:  I f the wireless net work is t urned off, press the W ifi but t on at t he back of t he VDSL Router for  one second. Once t he W ifi LED turns green, t he wireless net work is act ive.You can also use the W ifi but t on t o quickly set  up a secure w ireless connect ion bet ween t he VDSL Router and a WPS- com pat ible client by adding one device at a t im e.To act ivate WPS:1Make sure t he Pow e r LED is green and not blinking.2Press t he W ifi but t on for ten seconds and release it.
Chapter 1 Introducing the VDSL RouterBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide183Enable WPS on anot her WPS- enabled client  device within range of t he VDSL Router. I f you do not know how to enable WPS on t hat client device, refer t o its m anual. The W ifi LED flashes green and orange while t he VDSL Router set s up a WPS connection w it h t he ot her WPS enabled client  device. 4Once t he connect ion is successfully m ade, t he W ifi LED shines green.To t urn off the wireless net work, press t he W ifi but t on on t he front  of the VDSL Router for one t o five seconds. The W ifi LED t urns off when t he wireless network is off.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 19CHAPTER   2User Setup GuideThis chapt er cont ains instruct ions to quickly set  up feat ures on t he syst em .• Access the VDSL Router Configuration (Sect ion 2.1 on page 19)• Changing t he Configuration Passw ord ( Sect ion 2.2 on page 20)• Set t ing Up a 3G Backup I nt ernet  Connect ion (Sect ion 2.2 on page 20)• Set t ing your DSL Account’s Usernam e and Passw ord ( Sect ion 2.2 on page 20)• Sett up Up a Secure Wireless Net work (Sect ion 2.2 on page 20)• Using Wireless MAC Aut henticat ion to Block a Com put er ’s Access t o t he Wireless Network (Sect ion 2.3 on page 28)• Sett ing Up an NAT Virtual Server for a Gam e Server (Sect ion 2.4 on page 29)• Access Your Hom e Com put er from  t he I nt ernet Using DDNS ( Sect ion 2.5 on page 30)• Configuring the Firewall (Sect ion 2.6 on page 34)• LAN DHCP for I P Addressing Assignm ent  (Sect ion 2.7 on page 36)• Checking t he Software Version (Sect ion 2.8 on page 38)• Rest oring t o Fact ory Default  ( Section 2.9 on page 39)• How t o Use File Sharing on t he VDSL Router (Sect ion 2.10 on page 40)• Using the Media Server Feat ure ( Sect ion 2.11 on page 43)• How t o Share a USB Printer via Your VDSL Rout er ( Sect ion 2.12 on page 47)2.1  Access the VDSL Router Configuration1Connect  to t he Web Configurator t o configure the VDSL Rout er. Ent er the LAN I P address of t he VDSL Router in your web browser (see t he cover page of this guide for the default login in form at ion) .2The D evice  I nfo Sum m a ry screen displays. See Sect ion 3.2 on page 61 for m ore inform ation.
Chapter 2 User Setup GuideBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide202.2  Setting Up a Secure Wireless NetworkThom as set s up a wireless net work t o give his not ebook wireless I nt ernet  access. The VDSL Router serves as an access point ( AP)  to let t he not ebook connect  to the I nt ernet.Thom as configures t he wireless net work set t ings on t he VDSL Router and uses WPS ( Section 2.2.2 on page 22) or m anual configurat ion (Sect ion 2.2.3 on page 26)  to connect  his notebook.2.2.1  Configuring the Wireless Network SettingsThis exam ple uses t he following paramet ers to set  up a wireless net work.Note:  See t he sticker on the bottom  of the VDSL Router for the default wireless LAN SSI D, securit y m ode, and password.SSI D Exam pleSecu rity Leve l WPA2 - PSKW PA/ W API  pa ssph rase DoNot StealMyWirelessNetwor k8 0 2 .1 1  M ode 802.11b/ g/ n Mixed
 Chapter 2 User Setup GuideBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 211Click W irele ss t o display the w ireless sett ings. Make sure Enable  W ireless is select ed. Type Ex am ple in t he SSI D field.2Click W ir ele ss >  Se cu rit y, m ake sure Ena bled W PS is set t o Ena bled. Select  W PA2 - PSK in t he N etw ork  Au t he nt ica t ion field. Ent er t he W PA/ W API  passph ra se . Click Apply/ Save.
Chapter 2 User Setup GuideBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide22Use WPS to wirelessly connect  t he not ebook t o the VDSL Router (see Sect ion 2.2.2 on page 22) or use t he notebook’s wireless client  to search for the VDSL Router  (see Sect ion 2.2.3 on page 26) .2.2.2  Using WPSThis exam ple uses WPS to connect  a ZyXEL NWD210N wireless client t o t he VDSL Router’s wireless net work.  Note:  One way to see if the wireless client ( a notebook, sm artphone, tablet, wireless USB adapter, or wir eless PCMCIA card for exam ple)  supports WPS is t o look for t he WPS logo:
 Chapter 2 User Setup GuideBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 23I t  covers t wo WPS m ethods to set up the w ireless client  set t ings:•Push But t on Configu ra t ion ( PBC)  - simply press a but ton. This is the easier m ethod.•PI N  Configurat ion -  ent er a wireless client ’s Personal I dentificat ion Num ber (PI N)  in t he VDSL Rou t er .  Push Button Configuration (PBC)1Make sure t hat your VDSL Router is on and your notebook is wit hin range of the wireless signal. 2Make sure that you have inst alled t he wireless client driver and utilit y in your notebook.3I n the wireless client  utility, go to the WPS sett ing page. Enable WPS and press the W ifi but t on (St a r t  or W ifi button) .4Push and hold t he W ifi but t on locat ed on t he VDSL Rout er’s rear panel for 10 seconds. Note:  I t doesn’t  m at t er which device’s but t on you press first. You m ust  press the second button within two m inut es of pressing the first one. Note:  The WPS but t on in the Web Configurator screens also has the same funct ion as the one on t he VDSL Router rear panel:  use either.The VDSL Router sends the wireless net work set t ings to the wireless client . This m ay take up to two m inutes. After wards t he wireless client  can comm unicate wit h the VDSL Rout er securely.The following figure shows an exam ple of how t o set up a wireless net work and it s security by pressing a button on bot h VDSL Router and wir eless client .
Chapter 2 User Setup GuideBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide24Example WPS Process: PBC MethodPIN ConfigurationWhen you use t he PI N configurat ion m ethod, you need t o use both t he VDSL Rout er’s web configurat or and the wireless client ’s utilit y.1Launch your wireless client’s configurat ion utility. Go to t he WPS set t ings and select  t he PI N m et hod to get a PI N num ber.   2Log int o the VDSL Router’s web configurat or and click W ire less >  Se cur ity. Enable t he WPS funct ion and select  En ter  STA PI N. Ent er the PI N num ber of the w ireless client  and click the Add Enrollee  butt on. Click Apply / Sa ve .  Wireless Client VDSL RouterSECURITY INFOCOMMUNICATIONWITHIN 2 MINUTESPress an d hold for   1 0  se condsW ifi
 Chapter 2 User Setup GuideBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 253Act ivate WPS on t he wireless client ut ilit y screen wit hin t wo m inutes. The VDSL Router authent icat es t he wireless client  and sends it  t he proper configuration set t ings. This m ay take up to t wo minut es. The wireless client  can then com m unicat e wit h the VDSL Router  securely. The following figure shows how to set  up a wireless net work and its security on a VDSL Router and a wireless client by using PI N m et hod.
Chapter 2 User Setup GuideBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide26Example WPS Process: PIN Method2.2.3  Without WPSThis exam ple uses Windows XP t o connect  wirelessly to your VDSL Router. 1Right- click t he wireless adapter icon at  the bott om  right  of your com puter m onit or. Click Vie w  Available W ire less N etw orks.Authentication by PINSECURITY INFOWITHIN 2 MINUTESWireless ClientVDSL RouterCOMMUNICATION
 Chapter 2 User Setup GuideBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 272Select  the VDSL Router’s SSI D  nam e ( “ SecureWir elessNet work” in this exam ple) and click Con ne ct  ( A) .  3Enter t he passw ord when prom pted and click Conne ct . 4You m ay have t o wait  several m inutes while your com puter connect s t o t he wireless net work.5Congratulat ions!  Browse t o your favorite websites. I f you cannot, check that  you connected to the correct  AP, and the signal st rengt h is OK. Click your wireless adapt er’s icon and click Enable. Som e not ebooks also have a physical butt on t hat enables or disables the wireless adaptor. A
Chapter 2 User Setup GuideBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide282.3  Using Wireless MAC Authentication to Block a Computer’s Access to the Wireless NetworkUse M AC Aut hent ication to block a com puter from  accessing t he wireless net work based on t he com puter ’s MAC address.Note:  MAC Aut hent ication offers lim ited security.1Click W ireless >  MAC Filt er. I n the M AC Filt er screen, click Add.2I n t he M AC Address field, enter the MAC address of the computer  to block and click Apply/ Save .3The MAC address appears in t he M AC List . Set t he M AC Restr ict  M ode to Deny and click Add.
 Chapter 2 User Setup GuideBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 292.4  Setting Up a NAT Virtual Server for a Game ServerThis exam ples configures a virtual server t o forward t raffic from  Civilizat ion I V player s on t he I nt ernet  ( A in t he figure below) t o a server on a com put er behind the VDSL Router.Not e:  I f  fir ewall is enabled, you  m ay also need t o configu r e a fir ewall rule f or t he relevant  ports. See Sect ion 2.6.2 on page 34.Tutorial: NAT Port Forwarding Setup Thom as configures virtual servers t o forwar d TCP and UDP port  6500, and UDP por ts 2302 and 13139 t raffic t o port 6500 at the server’s I P address of 192.168.1.34.1Click Advance d Setup >  NAT >  Virt ua l Se rver s and then Add.2Select  the incom ing int er face for the traffic. Specify a nam e ( CivI V in this exam ple) in the Cu st om  Se rvice field. Set the Ser ve r  I P Address to 192.168.1.34. Add UDP ports 2302 and 13139 and port  num ber 6500 for TCP &  UDP prot ocols. Click TCP/ UD P.D=192.168.1.34 WANLANTCP/UDP port 6500AUDP ports 2302 and 13139
Chapter 2 User Setup GuideBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide30Players on t he I nt ernet then can access Thom as’ server.2.5  Access Your Home Computer from the Internet Using DDNSI t  is inconvenient  for you to access your hom e com put er  from  the I nternet if your VDSL Router uses a dynam ic WAN I P address since it changes dynam ically. Dynam ic DNS ( DDNS)  allows you to access your hom e com puter using a dom ain nam e. Note:  Enable rem ote desktop server service on your hom e com puter. The rem ote desktop server feat ure covered here is included in Windows Professional, Business, and Ultim at e versions.Not e:  I f  fir ewall is enabled, you  m ay also need t o configu r e a fir ewall rule f or t he relevant  ports. See Sect ion 2.6.2 on page 34.
 Chapter 2 User Setup GuideBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 31To use t his feat ure, apply for DDNS service at www.dyndns.org or TZO. This t ut orial covers:•Regist ering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org•Configuring DDNS on Your VDSL Rout er•Configuring Port Forwarding on your VDSL Router•Test ing t he DDNS Sett ingNote:  I f you have a private WAN I P address, then you cannot use DDNS.2.5.1  Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org1Open a browser and type h t t p:/ / w w w .dyn dn s.or g.2Apply for a user account. This t ut orial uses Use r N am e 1  and 1 2 3 4 5  as t he usernam e and password.3Log int o www.dyndns.org using your account .4Add a new DDNS host nam e. This t ut orial uses the following sett ings as an exam ple.• Hostname: zy x elr out e r .dyn dns. org• Service Type: Host  w ith I P addre ss• I P Address:  Enter  the WAN I P address t hat  your VDSL Router is current ly using. You can find t he I P address on the VDSL Router ’s Web Configurat or Stat us page.Then you w ill need t o configure t he sam e account  and host  nam e on the VDSL Router later.2.5.2  Configuring DDNS on Your VDSL RouterConfigure t he following sett ings in t he Adva nced Se t up >  DNS >  Dyna m ic DNS >  Add screen.• Select D yn D N S.or g as t he D- DNS provider.• Type zy xe lr ou t er .dynd ns.or g in the H ost  Nam e  field.• Leave t he inter face set  to the default  unless you have configured another interface t o use.• Ent er t he user nam e ( U se r N am e 1 )  and password ( 1 2 3 4 5 ) .• Click Apply/ Sa ve .w.x.y.z a.b.c.dhttp: / / zyxelrout er.dyndns.orgA
Chapter 2 User Setup GuideBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide322.5.3  Configuring Port Forwarding on your VDSL RouterConfigure t he following set t ings in t he Adva nce d Se tup >  N AT >  Virtua l Ser ve rs >  Add screen.• Leave t he inter face set  to the default  unless you have configured another interface t o use.• Select Cust om  Service  and type RD in the field.• Type the LAN I P address of your com puter in the Ser ver  I P Addr e ss f ield. To ch eck  t his on y our  hom e computer, click St ar t , All Pr ogram s, Acce ssor ies and t hen Com m and Prom pt. I n the Com m a nd Pr om pt window, type " ipconfig" and t hen press [ ENTER] . This exam ple uses 1 9 2 .1 6 8 .1 .6 4 . See Configuring St at ic DHCP to configure a Stat ic DHCP rule for t his I P address. • Type 3 3 8 9  in the Exter na l/ I nt ern al St a rt/ End Por t  fields. This is t he listening port for Windows rem ot e desktop.• Select  the TCP in t he Pro t ocol field.
 Chapter 2 User Setup GuideBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 33Click Apply / Sa ve .2.5.4  Testing the DDNS SettingTest  your access t o your com puter from  the I nt ernet . 1Open the remot e deskt op client  application on t he rem ot e comput er (using t he I P address a .b.c.d) that  is connect ed to t he I nt ernet .2Ty p e   ht t p:/ / z y xe lrou t er .dy ndn s. or g and press [ Ent er] .3Your com puter’s rem ote deskt op login page should appear.
Chapter 2 User Setup GuideBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide342.6  Configuring the FirewallClick Advan ce d Setup >  Firew all >  Ge ne ral and select Act ive  Fire w a ll to turn on Denial of Service ( DoS)  protect ion. Select  t he default policy’s Act iv e  check box t o block sessions initiated from  the I nternet  from  com ing in through the ppp0.1 WAN interface. Click Apply. Firewall Ex ample: Edit Rul e: Destina tion Address  2.6.1  Interface Default PolicyClick the Firew all >  Ge ne ral screen’s Add butt on t o add an interface default policy t o block or allow sessions init iated from  the net work connected to an int er face. This exam ple allows sessions initiat ed from  the I nternet to com e in t hrough t he ppp1.1 WAN interface.Firewall Ex ample: Edit Rul e: Destina tion Address  2.6.2  Firewall RulesUse Fir ew all >  Ru les t o control traffic by source and dest inat ion I P address and port .Note:  You m ay need t o configure a firewall rule for t he relevant ports if you use a NAT virt ual server or DMZ host . 1Click Add to creat e a new rule.
 Chapter 2 User Setup GuideBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 35Firewall Ex ample: Edit Rul e: Destina tion Address  2This exam ple allows incom ing TCP or UDP port  6500 t raffic from  int erface ppp0.1.
Chapter 2 User Setup GuideBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide36Firewall Ex ample: Edit Rul e: Destina tion Address  Firewall Example: Ed it Rule: Select Cus tomized Services3Your new rule displays in t he list.Firewall Ex ample: Edit Rul e: Destina tion Address  2.7  LAN DHCP for IP Addressing AssignmentThe following exam ple shows how to configure LAN DHCP set t ings. Click Adva nce d Se tup >  LAN  to display the LAN set t ings. Under the Ena ble DH CP Ser ve r option change the DHCP server I P address range. Set  Leased Tim e  to specify how long to lease an IP address t o a LAN com puter. Click Apply/ Save.
 Chapter 2 User Setup GuideBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 37Firewall Ex ample: Edit Rul e: Destina tion Address  2.7.1  Configuring Static DHCPUse stat ic DHCP t o have t he VDSL Router always give t he same I P address t o a specific com puter.1Click Advance d Setup >  LAN t o display the LAN sett ings. Under the Sta t ic I P Lease  List , click Add Ent r ies.
Chapter 2 User Setup GuideBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide38Firewall Ex ample: Edit Rul e: Destina tion Address  2Enter t he com put er ’s MAC address and t he LAN I P address t o give t he com puter and click Apply/Sa ve .2.8  Checking the Software Version Click . The Device I nfo. The screen displays t he version of t he soft ware inst alled on the VDSL Rou t er .
 Chapter 2 User Setup GuideBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 39Firewall Ex ample: Edit Rul e: Destina tion Address  2.9  Restoring to Factory Default This procedure rest ores the fact ory default set t ings t o the VDSL Router.1Click Manage m ent  >  Re st ore De fa ult  >  Re st ore D efault Set t ings.Firewall Ex ample: Edit Rul e: Destina tion Address  2Click OK.Firewall Ex ample: Edit Rul e: Destina tion Address  3The rest ore screen displays.
Chapter 2 User Setup GuideBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide40Note:  The Power LED flashes and stays on green when ready t o reconfigure. Follow the inst ruct ions provided by your I SP t o reprogram  your m odem . Note:  The VDSL Router’s back st icker displays t he default LAN I P address, usernam e, and password.Firewall Ex ample: Edit Rul e: Destina tion Address  2.10  How to Use File Sharing on the VDSL RouterThese sect ions cover how t o use file sharing t o allow LAN users t o access a USB st orage device connect ed t o t he VDSL Router as if it was direct ly connected to their com puters.Note:  Rem em ber to control physical access t o the USB drive so som eone doesn’t  access files by sim ply connect ing it to a com put er.2.10.1  Set Up File Sharing1Connect  your USB device t o t he USB port at  t he back panel of t he VDSL Router.2Click Advanced Setup >  USB Services >  File Shar ing and enable file sharing. Click Add ne w  user  to set  up a new  file sharing user account.
 Chapter 2 User Setup GuideBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 413Ent er  a user nam e and password and click Apply.4Disable the root  account and click Apply/ Sa ve .
Chapter 2 User Setup GuideBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide422.10.2  Access Your Shared Files From a ComputerNote:  This exam ple uses Microsoft ’s Windows 7 t o browse your shared files. 1Open Windows Explorer and in the address bar t ype a double backslash “ \ \ ”  followed by the VDSL Router’s LAN I P address and press [ ENTER] . 2A login scr een displays. Type the user nam e and password you set up for file sharing and click OK.  Note:  Once you log into the file share via your VDSL Router, you do not  have t o log in again unless you rest art your com put er or t he VDSL Router.3Double- click the usbshare  folder and browser it s cont ent s.
 Chapter 2 User Setup GuideBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 432.11   Using the Media Server FeatureThe m edia server st ream s video, m usic, and phot o files from  a USB st orage device t o DLNA-com pliant  m edia client s on your network. Connect t he USB st orage device to the VDSL Router’s USB port. This sect ion gives examples of using t he m edia server with the following media client s:  • Microsoft ( MS)  Windows Media Player • ZyXEL DMA- 2500, a digital m edia adapt er -  see t he DMA-2500 Quick St art Guide to set  up the DMA-2500 to work with your television ( TV)  before using t he inst ruct ions here.  2.11.1  Configuring the VDSL RouterClick Advan ce d Setup >  USB Se rvices >  Media  Se rver. The digit al m edia server set tings display. Enable t he digital m edia server and click Apply/ Save.Tutorial: USB  Services > Media  Server2.11.2  Using Windows Media PlayerThis sect ion shows you how t o play the media files on t he USB st orage device connect ed t o your VDSL Router using Windows Media Player. Tutorial: Media Server Setup (Using Windows Media Player)2.11.2.1  Windows Vista1Open Windows Media Player and click Libr ary >  Me dia Sh aring as follows.Computer withVDSL RouterUSB Storage DeviceWindows Media Player
Chapter 2 User Setup GuideBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide44Tutorial: Media Sharing using Windows Vista2Select  Find m edia t ha t  othe rs a re sh aring in the following screen and click OK.Tutorial: Media Sharing using Windows Vista (2)3The VDSL Rout er displays as a playlist  in the Libr ary screen’s left  panel. Click the category icons in the right  panel t o display the m edia files in the USB storage device at t ached t o your VDSL Router.
 Chapter 2 User Setup GuideBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 45Tutorial: Media Sharing using Windows Vista (3) 2.11.2.2  Windows 71Open Windows Media Player. I t aut om at ically detects t he VDSL Router . Right-click Ot her Libr aries >  Re fr esh Ot her  Librar ies if t he VDSL Rout er does not  display in the left panel.Tutorial: Media Sharing using Windows 7 (1)2Select  a category and wait for Windows Media Player to list the files available.  P8701TP8701TP8701TP8701T
Chapter 2 User Setup GuideBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide46Tutorial: Media Sharing using Windows 7 (2)2.11.3  Using a Digital Media AdapterThis sect ion shows you how t o use a ZyXEL DMA-2500 to play m edia files in a USB st orage device connect ed to t he VDSL Router.Note:  Set up your DMA-2500 with the TV according t o the inst ruct ions in the DMA- 2500 Quick St art  Guide before using this tut orial.1Connect  the DMA- 2500 t o an available LAN port  on your VDSL Router.Tutorial: Media Server Setup (Using DMA)2Turn on the TV and wait  for the DMA- 2500 Hom e screen t o appear. Using t he remot e control, go t o MyM edia  to open t he following screen. Select  the VDSL Router as your m edia server.P8701TP8701TDMA-2500VDSL RouterUSB Storage Device
 Chapter 2 User Setup GuideBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 47Tutorial: Media Sharing using DMA-25003The screen list s available m edia files in the USB st orage device. Select  a file and push t he Play butt on in the rem ote control t o open it .Tutorial: Media Sharing using DMA-2500 (2)2.12  How to Share a USB Printer via Your VDSL RouterYour VDSL Rout er can act as a print  ser ver and let  t he com puters on your net work use the USB print er  connect ed to the VDSL Router ’s USB port .1Go t o Advance d Se t up >  USB Se r vices >  to enable t he print  server function on the VDSL Rout er . Enter t he printer’s name and m anufact urer and m odel num ber. Click Apply/ Save to save your sett ings.
Chapter 2 User Setup GuideBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide482Connect  the USB printer to the VDSL Router if you have not done so already.3See Sect ion 2.12.1 on page 48 and/ or Sect ion 2.12.2 on page 52 for exam ples of how to set  up a print er  on your com puter. The com put er s on your net work m ust  have t he printer software already inst alled befor e they can use t he print er.Note:  Your print er ’s inst allat ion instructions m ay ask that you connect  t he printer to your com put er. Connect t he printer to t he VDSL Router inst ead.2.12.1  Add a New Printer Using WindowsThis exam ple shows how to connect a printer behind t he VDSL Router to a comput er using the Windows XP Professional. Som e m enu item s m ay look different on your operat ing syst em .1Click St art > Control Pa ne l > Print ers a nd Fa xes t o open t he Prin t ers a nd Fa xes screen. Click Add a Print e r.
 Chapter 2 User Setup GuideBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 492The Add Print er W iza rd screen displays. Click N e x t .3Select  A net w or k printer , or a printer at t a che d t o an ot he r com puter  and click N e x t .
Chapter 2 User Setup GuideBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide504Select  Connect  to a  print er on t he  I nter net or on  a hom e or  office net w ork : and enter “ http: / / 192.168.1.1: 631/ printers/ USB_PRI NTER” as t he URL to access the print  server ( VDSL Router). Click N ex t . Note:  I f you change t he VDSL Rout er’s LAN I P address, use the new I P address in the URL to access t he print server.5Select  the m ake of the printer t hat  you want to connect  to the print  server in the M a n ufa ct u r er  list  of printer s.6Select  the printer  m odel from the list  of Pr in t e rs.      7I f your pr int er is not  displayed in t he list  of Pr in t e rs, insert the printer dr iver inst allat ion CD/ disk or download t he driver file t o your com put er, click Ha ve Disk… and install the new printer driver. 8Click N e xt  t o cont inue.
 Chapter 2 User Setup GuideBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 51 9Select  Yes t o use t his print er as the default print er on your com put er. Otherwise select  N o. Click N e xt  t o cont inue. 10 The following screen show s your current  print er set t ings. Select  Finish to com plet e adding a new print er.
Chapter 2 User Setup GuideBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide522.12.2  Add a New Printer Using Macintosh OS XCom plet e t he following st eps t o set up a print server driver on your Macintosh com puter.2.12.2.1  Mac OS 10.3 and 10.4This exam ple shows how to connect a printer behind the VDSL Router to your com put er using Mac OS X v10.4.11. Som e m enu it em s m ay look different  on your operat ing syst em .1Click the Finder icon on the Dock ( a place holding a ser ies of icons/ shortcut s at  the bot tom  of the desktop) or double-click your Mac hard disk icon ( Mac OS X in t his exam ple) on your desktop.2The Mac HD window displays. Open t he Applica t ions folder.    3Open the Ut ilit ie s folder.
 Chapter 2 User Setup GuideBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 534Double- click the Pr inter  Se tup Ut ility icon.5Click the Add icon at t he t op of t he screen.6Click the I P Pr int er tab t o set up your printer. • Press the alt key and click M ore Print e rs in t he Print e r Brow se r screen. • Select Advance d from  t he top drop- down list .
Chapter 2 User Setup GuideBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide54• Select I nt e rnet Pr int ing Protocol using H TTP from  t he Device drop- down list .• Enter  a descriptive nam e for the printer in the Device  N am e field.• In the D evice URL field, ent er “ht t p: / / 192.168.1.1: 631/ printers/ USB_PRI NTER”  as t he URL to access t he print server ( VDSL Router) .Note:  I f you change t he VDSL Rout er’s LAN I P address, use the new I P address in the URL to access t he print server.• Select  your print er m anufact urer from  the Printer  Model drop- down list  and t hen select  a print er  m odel. Click Add t o save and close t he Printer  Br ow se r configuration screen.7The new  network printer displays in the Pr int er List . The default  print er N am e  displays in bold type. 8Your print  server driver set up is com plete. You can now use t he VDSL Router’s print server to print  from  a Mac com put er.2.12.2.2  Mac OS 10.5 and 10.6This exam ple shows how to connect a printer behind the VDSL Router to your com put er using Mac OS X v10.6.2. Som e m enu item s m ay look different  on your operating syst em .
 Chapter 2 User Setup GuideBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 551Click the Finder icon on the Dock or double-click your Mac hard disk icon (M ac OS X in this exam ple) on your deskt op t o open t he Mac HD window.2Open the Ap plica t ion s folder.    3Double- click the Syst e m  Pr efe rence s icon.4Click the Pr int  &  Fa x  icon.
Chapter 2 User Setup GuideBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide565Select  the Pr int in g tab and click t he + icon to add a new pr int er.6Click the Advance d butt on on the Add Pr inter  toolbar t o set  up your print er. I f t he Adva nced but t on doesn’t appear, Ctrl- click the t oolbar, select Cu st om ize Toolbar ... and then drag t he Adva nce d button ont o t he t oolbar.• Select I nt e rnet Pr int ing Protocol ( H TTP)  from  the Type drop-down list .• Select Anot he r Device from  t he D evice drop- down list.• In the URL field, ent er “ht t p: / / 192.168.1.1: 631/ printer s/ USB_PRI NTER”  as t he URL to access the print server ( VDSL Router) .Note:  I f you change t he VDSL Rout er’s LAN I P address, use the new I P address in the URL to access t he print server.• Ent er a descriptive nam e for the print er and where it  is located.
 Chapter 2 User Setup GuideBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 57• Select  your printer  m anufact urer from  the Prin t Using dr op- down list  and then select  a print er  m odel. Click Add t o save and close t he Printer  Br ow se r configuration screen.7The new  network printer displays in the Pr int e r s list. 8Your print  server driver set up is com plete. You can now use t he VDSL Router’s print server to print  from  a Mac com put er.
Chapter 2 User Setup GuideBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide58
59PART IITechnical Reference
60
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 61CHAPTER   3Device Info Screens3.1  OverviewUse t he D evice  I nfo screens to look at the current st at us of t he Device, syst em  resources, int erfaces ( LAN, WAN, and WLAN) , and SI P account regist rat ion st at us. 3.2  The Device Info Summary Screen Log int o the VDSL Router’s web configurat or or click Device I nfo > Sum m a ry to view a sum m ary screen of inform at ion about t he VDSL Rout er .Figure 4   Device I nfo Sum m ary Screen
Chapter 3 Device Info ScreensBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide62Each field is described in the following table.Table 2   Device I nfo Sum m ary ScreenLABEL DESCRIPTIONBoard I D This field displays the I D number of the circuit  board in t he VDSL Rout er. Sym m et ric CPU ThreadsThis field displays t he num ber of threads in t he VDSL Rout er’s CPU.Build Tim est am pThis field display s t h e dat e ( YYMMDD)  and t im e ( HHMM)  of  t h e fir m w are in  th e VDSL Rout er .Software Ve r si onThis field display s t he current version of t he firm ware inside t he VDSL Rout er. Bootloader ( CFE)  VersionThis field displays t he version of boot loader  t he VDSL Router is using.DSL PHY and Driver VersionThis field displays t he version of the m odem  code the VDSL Rout er is using.Wireless Driver  Ve r si onThis field displays t he version of the driver  for t he VDSL Router’s wireless chipset.Uptim e This field displays how  long t he VDSL Router has been running since it  last  st art ed up.Line Rate -  Upst ream   This field displays the WAN port ’s sending t raffic speed.Line Rate -  DownstreamThis field displays the WAN port ’s receiving traffic speed.LAN I Pv4 AddressThis field displays the current I P address of the VDSL Rout er in t he LAN. Default  GatewayThis field display s t he I P address of the gateway t hrough which t he VDSL Router sends traffic unless it  m at ches a st atic rout e.Prim ary DNS ServerThe VDSL Rout er  t ries this DNS server first  when it  needs to r esolve a dom ain nam e int o a num eric I P address.Secondary DNS ServerThe VDSL Rout er uses t his DNS server first  when it  needs to resolve a dom ain nam e int o a numeric I P address if the prim ary DNS server does not  respond.LAN I Pv6 Address ( Global)This field displays the current  global I Pv6 address of the VDSL Rout er.LAN I Pv6 Address (Link)This field displays the current I Pv6 addr ess of t he VDSL Rout er  in t he LAN.Default  I Pv6 GatewayThis field display s t he I Pv6 address of the gat eway  t hrough which the VDSL Router  sends I Pv6 traffic unless it  m atches a st at ic rout e.Date/ Tim e This field displays t he VDSL Rout er’s current  day  of t he week, m ont h, hour, m inut e, second, and year.Regist rat ion  Stat usAccount This colum n displays each SI P account in the VDSL Router.Service-Provider/ SI P Account Nu m berThis colum n displays t he service provider nam e and SI P num ber for each SI P account .
 Chapter 3 Device Info ScreensBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 633.3  The WAN Info ScreenLog int o the VDSL Router’s web configurat or and click Device I nfo >  W AN  t o view a sum mary screen of inform at ion about t he VDSL Rout er’s WAN connections.Figure 5   WAN I nfo ScreenAct ion I f t he SI P account is already regist ered wit h the SI P server, the Accou nt  St a t us field displays Re gist e r ed .• Click Un r egist e r  to delet e t he SI P account ’s regist rat ion in t he SI P server. This does not cancel your SI P account, but it  delet es the m apping between your SI P ident ity and your I P address or dom ain nam e.I f t he SI P account is not regist ered w it h t he SI P ser ver, t he Account  St atus field displays N ot  Re gist e r ed .• Click Re gist e r  t o have the VDSL Rout er at tem pt to regist er the SI P account with t he SI P server.The button is grayed out if the SI P account is disabled.Account St at us This field displays t he current  regist rat ion st at us of t he SI P account. You have to regist er SI P accounts with a SI P server t o use VoI P.I n act ive  -  The SI P account is not act ive. You can act ivate it in VoI P >  SI P >  SI P Accou nt .N ot Registered -   The last  tim e t he VDSL Router tried t o regist er t he SI P account with t he SI P server, the att em pt  failed. Use t he Regist er button to regist er the account  again. The VDSL Router aut om at ically tries t o regist er t he SI P account when you turn on the VDSL Router or when you act ivat e it.Regist e r ed -   The SI P account  is already regist ered with t he SI P server. You can use it to m ake a VoI P call.URI This field displays t he account  num ber and service dom ain of the SI P account. You can change t hese in t he VoI P >  SI P screens.Table 2   Device I nfo Sum m ary Screen ( continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 3 Device Info ScreensBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide64Each field is described in the following table.3.4  The 3G Status ScreenLog into the VDSL Router’s web configurat or and click Device I nfo >  3 G t o view a sum m ary screen of inform at ion about  t he VDSL Rout er’s 3G connect ion.Table 3   WAN I nfo Scr eenLABEL DESCRIPTIONI nterface This show s the nam e of the int erface used by t his connect ion.A default  nam e ipoa * , pppoa* , at m *  or pt m *  indicates DSL port . The ppp *  indicates a PPP connection via any one of the WAN int er face. The num ber aft er t he dot  (.)  represent s the VLAN I D num ber assigned to t raffic sent  through this connect ion. The num ber  aft er the underscor e ( _) represent s the index num ber of connect ions through the sam e int erface.( null)  m eans the ent ry is not valid.Description This is t he se rvice nam e of th is conne ct ion.0  and 3 5  or 0 and 1 are t he default  VPI  and VCI  num bers. The last  num ber represent s the index num ber of connect ions over t he sam e PVC or the VLAN I D num ber assigned to t raffic sent  through this connection.( null)  m eans the ent ry is not valid.Type This shows the m et hod of encapsulat ion used by t his connection. VlanMuxI D This indicates t he VLAN I D num ber assigned t o traffic sent  through t his connect ion. This displays N / A w hen t here is no VLAN I D num ber assigned.I Pv6 This displays whet her or not  IPv6 is enabled on the int erface.I gm p This show s whether  I GMP ( I nternet Group Mult icast  Pr otocol) is act ivat ed or not for t his connection. I GMP is not  available when the connect ion uses t he bridging service.MLD This show s whether  Mult icast  Listener Discovery ( MLD)  is act ivated or not  for t his connection. MLD is not available when the connect ion uses the bridging service.NAT This show s whet her NAT is act ivat ed or not  for t his int erface. NAT is not  available when the connect ion uses the bridging serv ice.St at us This displays t he connection st at e or  Un configured  if t he interface has not  yet been configured.I Pv4 Address This display s t he int erface’s current I Pv4 address if it  has one. Click co nne ct  t o initiate the WAN int erface’s connect ion.I Pv6 Address This display s t he int erface’s current I Pv6 address if it  has one. Click co nne ct  t o initiate the WAN int erface’s connect ion.
 Chapter 3 Device Info ScreensBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 65Figure 6   3G St atus ScreenEach field is described in the following table.3.5  The LAN Statistics Screen Log int o the VDSL Router’s web configurat or and click Device I nfo >  St a t ist ics >  LAN to view a sum mary screen of inform ation about t he VDSL Router’s LAN connect ions.Table 4   3G Stat us ScreenLABEL DESCRIPTIONSt at us • N oD e vice  when no 3G car d is insert ed, •Disabled when the 3G WAN is not act ivat ed, •Up when the 3G connect ion is up, •Dow n when the 3G connect ion is dow n, •N oRe sponse  when ther e is no response from  the insert ed 3G card, •I n va lidPI N  if the PI N code you ent ered in the W AN  >  3 G Ba ck up scr een is not  t he right one for  t he 3G card you insert ed, •N e edPU K if you ent er t he PI N ( Personal I dent ification Num ber)  code incorr ect ly for three tim es and t he SI M car d is blocked by your I SP, •DialFa il w hen t he VDSL Rout er fails to dial up a 3G connect ion.• or I n validSI M  when the SI M card is damaged or not  insert ed. I f a link displays in this field, click the link to view m or e st atus infor m at ion or ent er t he correct  PI N or  PUK (Personal Unblocking Key)  code.Service ProviderThis displays the nam e of your 3G net work  service pr ovider.Signal Str ength This displays the 3G connect ion’s signal qualit y. Connection Uptim eThis displays how long the 3G connect ion has been connect ed since it last  cam e up.3G Card Manu fact urerThis displays t he nam e of the com pany t hat produced t he 3G USB dongle.3G Card Model This displays the m odel nam e of the 3G USB dongle.3G Card F/ W Ve r si onThis displays the soft war e version of the 3G USB dongle.3G Car d I MEI I MEI  (I nt ernational Mobile Equipm ent  I dentity)  is a 15-digit  code in decim al form at  that  ident ifies the 3G device. SI M Card I MSI I MSI  ( I nternational Mobile Subscriber I dent ity)  is a 15- digit code that  identifies the SI M card.
Chapter 3 Device Info ScreensBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide66Figure 7   LAN St at istics ScreenEach field is described in the following table.3.6  The WAN Statistics ScreenLog int o the VDSL Router’s web configurat or and click Device I nfo >  St a t ist ics >  W AN  Se rv ice to view a sum m ary screen of inform at ion about  the VDSL Router’s WAN connections.Table 5   LAN St atist ics ScreenLABEL DESCRIPTIONI nter face  These fields identify the LAN int erfaces. e t h0  ~  eth 3  represent the ethernet LAN ports 1 ~  4. w lo represent s t he wireless LAN interface.Received /  Tr a n s m i t t e dThese fields display t he num ber of bytes, packet s, error  packets, and dropped packet s for each inter face.ReceivedBy tes This indicat es the num ber of bytes received on this interface.Pkt s This indicates the num ber of packet s received on this int erface.Errs This indicates the num ber of fram es wit h errors received on this interface.Drops This indicates t he num ber  of received packet s dropped on this inter face.Tr a n s m i t t e dByt es This indicates t he num ber of byt es t ransm it ted on t his int erface.Pkt s This indicat es t he num ber of transm itted packets on this int erface.Errs This indicates the num ber of fram es wit h errors transm it ted on this int er face.Drops This indicates the num ber of outgoing packet s dropped on this int erface.Reset  Statistics Click this to clear t he screen’s statist ics counter s.
 Chapter 3 Device Info ScreensBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 67Figure 8   WAN St at istics ScreenEach field is described in the following table.3.7  The xTM Statistics Screen Log int o the VDSL Router’s web configurat or and click Device I nfo >  St a t ist ics >  xTM  to display ATM or PTM connect ion inform at ion.Table 6   WAN St at ist ics ScreenLABEL DESCRIPTIONI nterface This show s the nam e of the WAN interface used by this connect ion.The default nam e ipoa* , p ppoa * , at m *  or ptm *  indicat es the DSL port. ppp*  indicates a PPP connection via any one of the WAN int er faces. ppp3 G0  indicates a PPP connect ion through t he 3G int erface.The num ber aft er t he dot  (.)  represent s the VLAN I D num ber assigned to t raffic sent  through this connect ion. The num ber  aft er the underscor e ( _) represent s the index num ber of connect ions through the sam e int erface.( null)  m eans the ent ry is not valid.Descr iption This show s the descript ive name of t his connect ion.ATM int er faces include t he VPI  and VCI . 0  and 3 5  or 0 and 1 ar e the default  VPI  and VCI num ber s. The last  num ber represents t he index num ber  of connect ions over  t he sam e PVC or the VLAN I D num ber assigned to t raffic sent  through t his connect ion.( null)  m eans the ent ry is not valid.ReceivedBy tes This indicates t he num ber of byt es received on this int erface.Pkt s This indicates the num ber of packet s received on this int erface.Errs This indicates the num ber of fram es wit h errors received on this interface.Drops This indicates t he num ber  of received packet s dropped on this inter face.Tr a n s m i t t e dByt es This indicates t he num ber of byt es t ransm it ted on t his int erface.Pkt s This indicat es t he num ber of transm itted packets on this int erface.Errs This indicates the num ber of fram es wit h errors transm it ted on this int er face.Drops This indicates the num ber of outgoing packet s dropped on this int erface.Reset  Statistics Click this to clear t he screen’s statist ics counter s.
Chapter 3 Device Info ScreensBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide68Figure 9   xTM St atist ics ScreenEach field is described in the following table.3.8  The xDSL Statistics ScreenLog into the VDSL Router’s web configurat or and click Device  I nfo >  St atistics >  x DSL t o display inform ation about the VDSL Router’s VDSL or ADSL connect ions.Table 7   xTM St at ist ics ScreenLABEL DESCRIPTIONPort  Num ber This ident ifies the ATM or PTM port. I n Oct et s This displays the num ber of 8- bit  binary digit s ( byt es)  received through t he port .Out Oct et s This displays the num ber  of 8-bit  binary digits (bytes)  sent through t he por t.I n Packet s This displays the num ber of packet s received t hrough t he port .Out Packet s This displays the num ber of packet s sent  through the port.I n OAM Cells This displays t he num ber of OAM ( Operat ional, Adm inist ration and Maint enance)  cells received through t he port.Out  OAM Cells This display s t he num ber of OAM cells sent  t hrough t he port .I n ASM Cells This displays the num ber of ASM ( Autonom ous St at us Message)  cells received through t he por t.Out ASM Cells This displays the number of ASM cells sent  t hr ough the port.I n Packet  Errors This displays the num ber of errored packet s received on the port.I n Cell Errors This displays t he number of err ored cells received on the port .Reset Click this t o clear t he screen’s statist ics counters.
 Chapter 3 Device Info ScreensBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 69Figure 10   xDSL St at istics ScreenEach field is described in the following table.Table 8   xDSL St at ist ics ScreenLABEL DESCRIPTIONMode This field identifies the DSL m ode of the DSL connection.Traffic Type This displays the t ype of t raffic the DSL port is sending and receiving.St at us This displays t he current st at e of set ting up the DSL connect ion.Link Power St at eThis displays the DSL connect ion’s current power usage or pow er saving m ode. null displays when there is no DSL connect ion.D o w n s t r e a m          T h e s e   a r e   t h e   st at ist ics for  t he t raffic direct ion com ing int o t he port from  the service provider.
Chapter 3 Device Info ScreensBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide70Upst ream These ar e t he st atist ics for the traffic direct ion going out from  the port  t o t he service provider.Line Coding ( Tr ellis)This display s whet her or not the por t is using Trellis coding for traffic. Tr ellis coding helps t o reduce t he noise in ADSL transm issions. Trellis m ay reduce t hroughput  but  it m akes the connection m ore st able.SNR Mar gin ( 0.1 dB)This displays the Signal-t o- Noise Ratio m argin ( in 0.1 dB) . A DMT sub- carrier’s SNR is the rat io between the received signal power and the received noise pow er. The signal-t o- noise rat io m ar gin is the m axim um  t hat the received noise power  could increase with t he syst em  st ill being able t o m eet  it s transm ission t ar gets.At tenuation ( 0.1 dB)This displays the line attenuat ion, m easured in tenths of a decibel ( 0.1 dB) . This at tenuation is the differ ence bet ween the power transm itt ed at  the near- end and the power received at the far- end. Att enuat ion is affected by t he channel charact erist ics (wire gauge, qualit y, condit ion and length of the physical line).Output Power ( 0.1 dBm )This displays the far  end act ual aggregat e transm it  power ( in dBm ) . Dow nst ream  is how  m uch por t the ser vice provider is using to transm it t o the port. Upst ream  is how m uch pow er t he por t is using t o t ransm it to the ser vice provider. At tainable Rate ( Kb ps) :These are the highest theoret ically possible transfer rat es at  w hich t he port could send and receive dat a.Rate ( Kbps) This displays the dat a transfer rat es at which the port  is receiving and sending.Super  Frames This displays t he number of ADSL superfram es t he DSL connect ion received and transm itted. Each superfram e cont ains 68 ADSL dat a frames and a one- fram e synch sym bol for a t ot al num ber of 69 fram es.Super Fram e Error sThis displays the number of errored ADSL superfram es the DSL connect ion received and t ransm it t ed.RS Words This displays the num ber of Reed Solom on error correction words for received and transm itt ed traffic.RS Correct able Error sThis displays the num ber of error ed packets correct ed by Reed Solom on error correct ion for  received and t ransm it ted traffic.RS Uncorrect able Error sThis displays the number of errored packet s that  Reed Solom on er ror correct ion could not  correct  for received and t ransm it ted traffic.HEC Errors Header Error  Cont rol ( HEC)  check s for errors in packet  headers.OCD Er rors The num ber of Out of Cell Delineat ion errors for received and t ransm it ted traffic. An OCD error m eans seven consecut ive ATM cells had Header Error Cont rol ( HEC)  violations.LCD Errors The number of Loss of Cell Delineat ion error s for r eceived and t ransm it ted traffic. An LCD st at e m eans an OCD condit ion per sist ed for 4 m illiseconds.Total Cells This display s the t ot al num ber of DSL cells including headers.Dat a Cells This displays the num ber of data payload DSL cells, excluding headers.Bit Er rors This displays t he num ber of err or ed bit s.Total ES This displays the num ber of Error ed Seconds m eaning t he num ber  of seconds containing at  least  one er rored block or at  least  one defect.Total SES This display s the num ber of Severely Errored Seconds m eaning the number of seconds cont aining 30%  or m ore errored blocks or  at least  one defect . This is a subset  of ES.Total UAS This displays the num ber of UnAvailable Seconds.xDSL BER Test Click this to open a screen where you can perform  a ADSL Bit Error Rat e (BER)  test  t o det erm ine t he qualit y of t he ADSL connection.Reset  Statistics Click this to clear t he screen’s statist ics counter s.Table 8   xDSL St at ist ics Screen ( continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
 Chapter 3 Device Info ScreensBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 713.8.1  The ADSL BER Test ScreenDo the following while the VDSL Router  has an ADSL connection t o perform  a ADSL Bit Error Rat e ( BER)  t est  to determ ine the qualit y of t he ADSL connection.1Log int o the VDSL Router’s web configurat or and click Device I nfo >  St a t ist ics >  x DSL >  xD SL BER Test  to display this screen. Select  a t est  durat ion and click St a rt . 2Click St op t o finish the t est .  3The t est  results display including the t est ’s duration, the num ber of bit s transfer red, t he num ber of err ored bit s, and t he rat io of errored bits t o t ransm itted bit s. 3.9  The Route Info ScreenLog int o the VDSL Router’s web configurat or and click Device  I nfo >  Rou t e to display the VDSL Rou t er ’s rout ing t able.
Chapter 3 Device Info ScreensBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide72Figure 11   Route I nfo ScreenEach field is described in the following table.3.10  The ARP Info ScreenLog int o the VDSL Router’s web configurat or and click Device  I nfo >  ARP to display Address Resolution Prot ocol inform ation. This screen lists t he I P addresses the VDSL Router has m apped to MAC addresses.Figure 12   ARP I nfo ScreenEach field is described in the following table.Table 9   Rout e I nfo ScreenLABEL DESCRIPTIONDest inat ion This displays the I P address to which this entr y applies.Gat eway  This displays the gat ew ay  t he VDSL Router uses to send t raffic to t he ent ry’s destinat ion addr ess. Subnet  Mask  This displays t he subnet  m ask of the dest inat ion net .Flag  This displays whet her t he rout e is up ( U), t he VDSL Rout er drops packet s for t his dest ination (!) , the rout e uses a gateway  ( G), the target  is a host  ( H), reinst at e route for dynam ic rout ing ( R), t he rout e was dynam ically inst alled by redirect ( D), or m odified from  redirect  ( M) .Met ric  The m et r ic represent s the “ cost ”  of t ransm ission for rout ing purposes. I P rout ing uses hop count  as t he m easurem ent  of cost , w it h a m inim um  of 1 for  directly- connect ed networks.Service  The nam e of a specific serv ice t o which the rout e applies if one is specified.I nter face The int erface t hrough which this rout e sends t raffic.Table 10   ARP I nfo ScreenLABEL DESCRIPTIONI P addr ess The learned I P address of a device connect ed t o one of t he syst em ’s ports.Flags  St at ic -  st at ic ent ry, Dyna m ic -  dynam ic entry t hat is not  yet  com plet e, Com p let e  -  dynamic entr y t hat  is com plet e.HW Addr ess  The MAC address of the device wit h t he listed I P address.Device  The interface through which the VDSL Router sends traffic to t he device listed in the entry.
 Chapter 3 Device Info ScreensBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 733.11  The DHCP Leases ScreenLog int o the VDSL Router’s web configurat or and click Device  I nfo >  DH CP to display the VDSL Router’s list  of I P address curr ent ly leased t o DHCP client s.Figure 13   DHCP Leases ScreenEach field is described in the following table.Table 11   DHCP Leases ScreenLABEL DESCRIPTIONHost nam e This field displays t he nam e used to ident ify this dev ice on t he net wor k ( t he com put er nam e) . The VDSL Router learns these from  the DHCP client request s. “ None” shows here for a st at ic DHCP entry.MAC Address  This field displays the MAC address to which the I P address is current ly assigned or  for which the I P address is reserved. Click the column’s heading cell t o sort  the table ent ries by MAC address. Click the heading cell again t o reverse t he sort  order.I P Address  This field displays the I P addr ess currently assigned to a DHCP client  or  reserved for a specific MAC address. Click the column’s heading cell t o sor t the t able entr ies by I P address. Click the heading cell again t o reverse t he sort or der.Expires I n  This field displays how m uch longer  t he I P addr ess is leased to t he DHCP client .
Chapter 3 Device Info ScreensBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide74
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 75CHAPTER   4WAN4.1  OverviewThis chapt er discusses t he VDSL Rout er’s W AN  screens. Use these screens t o configure your VDSL Router for I nternet  access.A WAN ( Wide Area Network) connection is an outside connect ion to another networ k or  the I nt ernet . I t connect s your pr ivate networks, such as a LAN ( Local Area Net work) and ot her  net works, so that  a com puter in one locat ion can com m unicate wit h com puters in ot her locations.Figure 14   LAN and WAN3G (third generat ion)  st andar ds for the sending and receiving of voice, video, and dat a in a m obile environm ent . You can at t ach a 3G wireless adapter to the USB port and set  t he VDSL Router to use t his 3G connect ion as your WAN or  a backup when t he wired WAN connect ion fails.Figure 15   3G WAN Connect ion 4.1.1  What You Can Do in this Chapter• Use the La ye r 2  I nterface screens t o view, rem ove or  add layer-2 WAN interfaces ( Sect ion 4.2 on page 78 and Sect ion 4.3 on page 81) .WAN
Chapter 4 WANBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide76• Use the W AN  Se rvice screens to view, rem ove or add a WAN int erface. You can also configure the WAN sett ings on t he VDSL Router for I nternet  access ( Sect ion 4.4 on page 83) .• Use the 3 G Ba ck up screen t o configure 3G WAN connect ion (Sect ion 4.5 on page 97) . 4.1.2  What You Need to KnowThe following t erm s and concept s m ay help as you r ead t his chapter.Encapsulation MethodEncapsulat ion is used t o include data from  an upper layer pr ot ocol into a lower layer prot ocol. To set up a WAN connect ion to t he I nt ernet , you need t o use t he same encapsulation m et hod used by your I SP (I nt ernet  Service Provider). I f your I SP offers a dial- up I nt ernet connect ion using PPPoE ( PPP over Ether net ), they should also provide a usernam e and password ( and service nam e)  for user aut hent icat ion.WAN IP AddressThe WAN I P address is an I P address for t he VDSL Router, which m akes it  accessible from  an out side net work. I t  is used by the VDSL Router to comm unicate wit h ot her devices in other  net works. I t  can be st atic ( fixed)  or dynam ically assigned by t he I SP each t im e t he VDSL Rout er tries t o access t he I nter net .I f your I SP assigns you a st at ic WAN I P address, t hey should also assign you the subnet  m ask and DNS server I P address( es) .ATMAsynchronous Transfer Mode ( ATM)  is a WAN net working t echnology t hat  prov ides high- speed dat a transfer. ATM uses fixed- size packets of inform at ion called cells. With ATM, a high QoS ( Qualit y of Table 12   WAN Set up Overview LAYER-2 INTERFACE INTERNET CONNECTIONCONNECTION DSL LINK TYPE MODE ENCAPSULATION CONNECTION SETTINGSADSL/ VDSL over PTMN/ A Routing PPPoE PPP inform at ion, I Pv4/ IPv6 I P addr ess, rout ing feat ure, DNS server, VLAN, QoS, and MTUI PoE I Pv4/ I Pv6 I P address, rout ing feature, DNS server, VLAN, QoS,  and MTUBridge N/ A VLAN and QoSADSL over ATM EoA Routing PPPoE/ PPP0A ATM PCV configurat ion, PPP inform at ion, I Pv4/ I Pv6 IP address, rout ing feat ure, DNS server, VLAN, QoS, and MTUI PoE/ I PoA ATM PCV configurat ion, I Pv4/ I Pv6 I P address, rout ing feat ure, DNS server, VLAN, QoS, and MTUBridge N/ A ATM PCV configurat ion, and QoS
 Chapter 4 WANBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 77Service)  can be guarant eed. ATM uses a connect ion- orient ed m odel and est ablishes a virt ual circuit ( VC) bet ween Finding Out MorePTMPacket  Transfer  Mode ( PTM)  is packet-orient ed and support ed by the VDSL2 st andard. I n PTM, packets are encapsulated direct ly in t he High- level Dat a Link Cont rol ( HDLC) fram es. I t  is designed to provide a low- overhead, t ransparent way of transporting packets over DSL links, as an alternat ive t o ATM.3G 3G (Third Generat ion) is a digital, packet-switched wireless t echnology. Bandwidth usage is opt im ized as m ultiple users share the sam e channel and bandwidt h is only allocat ed t o users when t h ey  send dat a.  I t  allows fast  t ransfer of  voice and non-voice dat a and provides broadband I nternet  access to m obile devices. IPv6 IntroductionI Pv6 (I nternet  Protocol version 6), is designed t o enhance I P address size and features. The increase in I Pv6 address size t o 128 bits ( from  the 32-bit  I Pv4 address)  allows up t o 3.4 x 1038 I P addresses. The VDSL Router can use I Pv4/ I Pv6 dual st ack to connect  t o I Pv4 and I Pv6 net works, and supports I Pv6 rapid deploym ent  ( 6RD) . IPv6 AddressingThe 128- bit  I Pv6 address is writ ten as eight  16- bit  hexadecimal blocks separat ed by colons ( : ) . This is an exam ple I Pv6 address 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000.I Pv6 addr esses can be abbreviated in tw o ways:• Leading zeros in a block can be om it t ed. So 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 can be written as 2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0. • Any num ber of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double colon can only appear once in an I Pv6 address. So 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015 can be writ ten as 2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015, 2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15 or 2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15.IPv6 Prefix and Prefix LengthSim ilar to an I Pv4 subnet  m ask, I Pv6 uses an address prefix to represent  t he net work address. An I Pv6 prefix lengt h specifies how m any m ost  significant  bit s ( st art from  t he left) in the address com pose t he net work address. The prefix lengt h is writt en as “ / x”  where x is a num ber. For exam ple, 2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32m eans that  the first  32 bit s ( 2001:db8) is t he subnet  prefix.
Chapter 4 WANBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide78IPv6 Subnet MaskingBoth an I Pv6 address and I Pv6 subnet  m ask com pose of 128-bit  binary digit s, which ar e divided int o eight 16-bit blocks and writ t en in hexadecim al notation. Hexadecim al uses four bit s for each charact er (1 ~  10, A ~  F) . Each block’s 16 bits ar e then represent ed by four hexadecim al charact ers. For exam ple, FFFF: FFFF: FFFF: FFFF: FC00: 0000: 0000: 0000.4.1.3  Before You BeginYou need t o know your I nt ernet  access sett ings such as encapsulation and WAN I P address. Get t his inform ation from  your I SP.4.2  The Layer-2 Interface ATM ScreenThe VDSL Rout er  m ust  have a layer -2 int erface t o allow users t o use t he DSL port t o access the I nt ernet . The scr een varies depending on t he interface type you select . Log into the VDSL Router’s web configurat or and click Advance d Setup >  La ye r2  I nt erface  >  ATM  I nter fa ce  to m anage the ATM layer- 2 int erfaces. Note:  The ATM and PTM layer- 2 int erfaces cannot  work at t he sam e tim e.Figure 16   Layer- 2 I nt erface:  ATMThe following t able describes t he fields in this screen. Table 13   Layer-2 I nter face:  ATMLABEL DESCRIPTIONI nterface The nam e of a configured layer- 2 interface. Vpi This displays the Virtual Pat h I dent ifier ( VPI ) . Vci This displays t he Virtual Channel I dent ifier ( VCI ).DSL Latency This displays whet her the ATM int erface uses int er leav e delay ( Pa t h1 )  or fast  m ode wit h no interleave delay (Pa t h 0 ) .Cat egory   This displays the ATM traffic class.Peak  Cell Rate This displays the m axim um  rate at which the sender can send cells. Sustainable Cell Rat eThis display s the average cell rate ( long-t erm )  at  which the sender can send cells. Max Burst  Size This displays the m axim um  num ber of cells that  can be sent at  t he peak rat e.Link Type This is the DSL link type of t he ATM layer- 2 int erface.Conn Mode This show s the connect ion m ode of the layer-2 int erface.
 Chapter 4 WANBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 794.2.1  Layer-2 ATM Interface ConfigurationClick the Add button in the La yer2  I nterface : ATM screen t o open t he following screen. Use t his screen t o creat e a new layer-2 int erface. You can have m ultiple ATM layer-2 interfaces using different  VPI  and/ or VCI  values. The screen var ies depending on t he int er face t ype you select .Figure 17   DSL ATM I nt erface Configurat ionI P QoS This displays whet her QoS (Qualit y of Service)  is enabled on the int erface.MPAALPrec/ Alg/ WghtThis displays the int erface’s default queue precedence, queuing algorit hm , and w eight ed round r obin w eight .Rem ove Select  an int erface and click  t he Re m ove butt on to delet e it . You cannot rem ove a layer-2 interface when a WAN service is associat ed with it .Add Click this but ton t o creat e a new ATM layer- 2 inter face.Table 13   Layer-2 I nter face:  ATM (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 4 WANBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide80The following t able describes t he fields in this screen. Table 14   Layer-2 ATM I nterface Configurat ionLABEL DESCRIPTIONATM PVC ConfigurationVPI  (Virt ual Pat h I dent ifier ) and VCI  ( Virtual Channel I dentifier) define a vir tual cir cuit . This sect ion is available only when you configur e an ATM layer- 2 int erface.VPI The valid range for  t he VPI  is 0 t o 255. Ent er the VPI  assigned to you.VCI The valid range for t he VCI  is 32 to 65535 ( 0 t o 31 is reserved for local m anagem ent  of ATM traffic) . Ent er the VCI  assigned t o you.Select  DSL Lat ency Select  Pat h0  ( Fa st )  to use no int er leaving and have fast er t ransm ission ( a “fast  channel” ) . Suit able only for a good line wit h lit tle need for er ror correct ion.At  t he tim e of writ ing t he VDSL Rout er supports fast  m ode only and interleaved is reserved for fut ur e use. Select  DSL Link Ty p eSelect  EoA (Ethernet  over ATM)  t o have an Et hernet  header in t he packet , so that  you can have m ult iple services/ connect ions over  one PVC. You can set  each connection to have its own MAC address or all connect ions shar e one MAC address but  use different VLAN I Ds for different services. EoA supports ENET ENCAP ( I PoE), PPPoE and RFC1483/2684 bridging encapsulat ion m et hods. Select  PPPoA (PPP over ATM)  to allow j ust one PPPoA connect ion over a PVC.Select  I PoA (I P over ATM) to allow just  one RFC 1483 r out ing connect ion over  a PVC.Encapsulat ion ModeSelect  t he I SP’s m et hod of m ultiplexing.•VC/ M UX: I n VC m ultiplexing, each protocol is carried on a separat e ATM virt ual circuit  ( VC). To transport  multiple prot ocols, the VDSL Rout er needs separat e VCs. There is a binding bet ween a VC and the type of the net work  prot ocol carried on t he VC. This reduces pay load overhead since there is no need to car ry prot ocol inform at ion in each Prot ocol Dat a Unit  (PDU) payload.•LLC/ SN AP- BRI DGI N G:  I n LCC encapsulation, bridged PDUs are encapsulated by identifying t he type of the bridged m edia in the SNAP header. This is available only  when you select  EoA in the Se lect  D SL Link  Type field. •LLC/ EN CAPSU LATI ON :  More t han one prot ocol can be car ried over the same VC. This is available only when you select  PPPoA in t he Se le ct  DSL Link Type field.•LLC/ SN AP- RO UTI N G:  I n LCC encapsulation, bridged PDUs are encapsulated by identifying t he type of the bridged m edia in the SNAP header. This is available only  when you select  EoA in the Se lect  D SL Link  Type field. Ser vice Cat egory Select UBR W it hout  PCR or UBR W it h PCR for applicat ions that  are non- tim e sensitive, such as e- m ail. Select  CBR (Cont inuous Bit Rat e)  t o specify fixed (always- on) bandwidth for voice or dat a traffic. Select  N on Rea ltim e  V BR ( non r eal- time Var iable Bit  Rat e)  for  connect ions that  do not  require closely cont rolled delay and delay variat ion.Select  Realtim e  VBR (real- time Var iable Bit Rate)  for applicat ions wit h burst y connect ions that require closely cont rolled delay and delay variat ion. Peak Cell Rat e Divide t he DSL line rat e ( bps)  by 424 ( t he size of an ATM cell) t o find t he Peak  Cell Rat e ( PCR). This is the m axim um  rate at  which the sender can send cells. Type t he PCR here.This field is not available when you select UBR W it hou t PCR.Su st ainable  Cell Rat eThe Sust ain Cell Rat e (SCR)  set s the average cell rate ( long- term ) t hat can be transm itted. Type t he SCR, which must  be less than the PCR. Note t hat syst em  default  is 0 cells/ sec. This field is available only when you select  N on Rea lt im e VBR or Rea lt im e VBR.Maximum  Burst  SizeMaxim um Burst  Size ( MBS)  refers to t he m axim um  num ber  of cells that  can be sent at  the peak rat e. Type the MBS, which is less than 65535. This field is available only when you select  N on Rea lt im e VBR or Rea lt im e VBR.
 Chapter 4 WANBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 814.3  The Layer-2 Interface PTM ScreenThe VDSL Rout er  m ust  have a layer -2 int erface t o allow users t o use t he DSL port t o access the I nt ernet . The scr een varies depending on t he interface type you select . Log into the VDSL Router’s web configurat or and click Advance d Setup >  La yer 2  I nt e rface  >  PTM I nt e rface  to m anage the PTM layer-2 interfaces. Note:  The ATM and PTM layer- 2 int erfaces cannot  work at t he sam e tim e.Figure 18   Layer- 2 I nt erface:  PTMScheduler Select  t he scheduler t o use for queues that  have t he sam e precedence as the default  queue. Queuing applies only when a port  has m ore traffic than it  can handle. W eight ed Rou nd Robin scheduling services queues of t he sam e priority level on a rot at ing basis based on their queue weight. The higher a queue’s weight , the m ore service it  gets.  This queuing m echanism  divides any available bandwidth across t he different t raffic queues and ret urns to queues that  have not  yet  em ptied.W eight ed Fa ir  Queuing guarant ees each queue's m inim um  bandwidt h based on it s queue weight  during t raffic congest ion. This queuing m echanism  divides any available bandwidth across the differ ent  t raffic queues. Weight ed fair queuing handles packet s of var ious sizes bett er than weight ed round robin queuing does.Default  Queue Weig htSpecify t he VC’s weight  for weighed fair  queuing. The higher the weight , t he bigger por tion of t he bandwidth the VC get s.Default  Queue PrecedenceSpecify t he VC’s priority for weighed fair queuing. The sm aller t he num ber t he higher the priority.VC WRR Weight Specify the VC’s weight  for  w eighted round robin queuing. The higher the weight , t he bigger port ion of the bandwidth the VC get s.VC Precedence Specify t he VC’s priority for weighted round robin queuing. The sm aller the number t he higher t he priority.Back Click this but ton t o ret urn t o t he previous screen wit hout saving any changes.Apply/ Save Click t his but t on to sav e your  changes and go back to the previous screen.Table 14   Layer-2 ATM I nterface Configurat ion ( continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 4 WANBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide82The following t able describes t he fields in this screen. 4.3.1  Layer-2 PTM Interface ConfigurationClick the Add button in the La ye r2  I nterface : PTM screen t o open the following screen. Use t his screen t o creat e a new layer-2 interface. Figure 19   DSL PTM I nt erface Configuration Table 15   Layer-2 I nter face:  PTMLABEL DESCRIPTIONI nterface The nam e of a configured layer- 2 interface. DSL Latency This displays whet her t he ATM int erface uses interleave delay (Pat h1 ) or  fast  m ode with no interleave delay (Pa t h 0 ) .PTM Priority This does not  apply at  t he tim e of writ ing.Conn Mode This show s the connect ion m ode of the layer-2 int erface.I P QoS This displays whet her QoS (Qualit y of Service)  is enabled on the int erface.Rem ove Select  an int erface and click t he Re m ove  butt on t o delete it. You cannot rem ove a layer -2 interface when a WAN service is associat ed with it .Add Click this but ton t o creat e a new ATM layer- 2 inter face.
 Chapter 4 WANBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 83The following t able describes t he fields in this screen. 4.4  The WAN Service Screen Use t his screen t o change your VDSL Router’s WAN sett ings. Click Advance d Setup >  W AN  Se rvice. The sum m ary table shows you the configured WAN services (connect ions)  on t he VDSL Rou t er .  To use NAT, firewall or I GMP proxy in the VDSL Router, you need t o configure a WAN connect ion with PPPoE or I PoE.Note:  When a layer- 2 interface is in VLAN MUX Mode, you can configure up t o five WAN services on the VDSL Rout er.Table 16   Layer-2 PTM I nt erface Configurat ionLABEL DESCRIPTIONSelect  DSL Lat ency Select  Pat h0  ( Fa st )  to use no int er leaving and have fast er t ransm ission ( a “fast  channel” ) . Suit able only for a good line wit h lit tle need for er ror correct ion.At  t he tim e of writ ing t he VDSL Rout er supports fast  m ode only and interleaved is reserved for fut ur e use. Scheduler Select  t he scheduler t o use for queues that  have t he sam e precedence as the default  queue.W eight ed Rou nd Robin scheduling services queues of t he sam e priority level on a rot at ing basis based on their queue weight. The higher a queue’s weight , the m ore service it  gets.  This queuing m echanism  divides any available bandwidth across t he different t raffic queues and ret urns to queues that  have not  yet  em ptied.During traffic congest ion W eighte d Fa ir  Queu ing guarant ees each queue's m inim um  bandwidth based on it s default  queue weight. This queuing m echanism  divides any available bandwidth across the different t raffic queues. Weighted fair queuing applies only when a port has m ore t raffic than it  can handle. Default  Queue Weig htSpecify t he PTM int erface’s weight  for  weighed fair queuing. The higher t he weight , t he bigger port ion of the bandwidth the PTM interface gets.Default  Queue PrecedenceSpecify t he PTM int erface’s prior ity for weighed fair queuing. The sm aller the num ber t he higher the priorit y.Default  Queue Shaping Rat eSpecify the m axim um  transm ission rat e allowed for traffic on this queue. Default  Queue Shaping Burst  SizeSpecify the m aximum  num ber  of cells that  can be sent  at  the default queue shaping rate. Back Click this but ton t o ret urn t o t he previous screen wit hout saving any changes.Apply/ Save Click t his but t on to sav e your  changes and go back to the previous screen.
Chapter 4 WANBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide84Figure 20   WAN Ser vice The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen. Table 17   WAN ServiceLABEL DESCRIPTIONI nter face This shows the nam e of t he int erface used by  t his connect ion.A default  nam e ipoa * , pppoa * , a t m *  or pt m *  indicates the DSL port. ppp*  indicates a PPP connect ion through any one of the WAN int erfaces. The num ber after t he dot  (.)  r epresents the VLAN I D num ber assigned t o t raffic sent  through this connection. The number after t he underscore (_)  represent s t he index num ber  of connect ions through t he same int erface.( null)  m eans the ent ry is not  valid.Description This is t he se rvice  na m e  of t his conne ct ion .0  and 3 5  or 0 and 1 are the default VPI  and VCI num bers. The last  num ber represent s the index num ber of connect ions over t he sam e PVC or the VLAN I D num ber assigned to t raffic sent  through this connection.( null)  m eans the ent ry is not  valid.Type This shows the m et hod of encapsulat ion used by  t his connect ion. Vlan8021p This indicat es the 802.1P pr iority level assigned t o traffic sent through this connect ion. This displays N / A w hen t here is no priority level assigned.VlanMuxI d This indicat es t he VLAN I D num ber assigned t o traffic sent  through t his connect ion. This displays N / A w hen t here is no VLAN I D num ber assigned.ConnI d This shows the index num ber of each connect ion. This displays N / A when the interface used by t he connect ion is in Defa ult  Mode.I gm p This shows whet her I GMP (I nt er net Group Multicast  Prot ocol)  is act ivat ed or not  for this connection. I GMP is not  available w hen the connect ion uses the bridging service.NAT This shows whet her  NAT is act ivat ed or not  for  t his int erface. NAT is not available when the connect ion uses the bridging ser vice.I Pv6 This shows whet her I Pv6 is act ivat ed or not  for this connection. I Pv6 is not  available when the connect ion uses the bridging ser vice.Mld This shows whet her Mult icast Listener  Discovery (MLD) is act ivat ed or not  for t his connect ion. MLD is not  available when the connection uses t he bridging service.Rem ove Select  an int erface and click the Rem ove but ton t o delet e it . You cannot  rem ove a layer- 2 int erface when a WAN service is associated wit h it .Modify Click the Edit  icon to configure the WAN connect ion.Click the Re m ove  icon t o delet e the WAN connect ion.Add Click Add to creat e a new  connect ion.
 Chapter 4 WANBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 854.4.1  WAN Connection ConfigurationClick the Edit  or Add butt on in the W AN  Service  screen t o configure a WAN connect ion. 4.4.1.1  WAN InterfaceThis screen displays when you add a new WAN connect ion.Figure 21   WAN Configurat ion:  WAN I nterface The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen. 4.4.1.2  Service Type I f you set t he DSL link t ype to PPPoA or I PoA for the ATM int erface and configur e a WAN connect ion using t he ATM interface, you only need t o configure the Ent e r Se rvice  Description field in this screen.Table 18   WAN Configuration:  WAN I nt erfaceLABEL DESCRIPTIONSelect  a layer 2 int erface for this serv iceSelect  pt m x  to use the DSL port as the WAN port and use the VDSL technology for data t ransm ission.Select  at m x  or ipoa x (w here x st art s from  0 and is the index number of ATM layer- 2 interfaces using different  VPI  and/ or VCI values)  t o use the DSL port as the WAN por t and use t he ADSL technology for data t ransm ission.Back Click t his butt on to return to t he previous screen.Next Click this butt on to cont inue.
Chapter 4 WANBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide86Figure 22   WAN Configurat ion:  Service TypeFigure 23   The following table describes the labels in t his screen.  Table 19   WAN Configuration:  Service TypeLABEL DESCRIPTIONSelect  WAN serv ice typeSelect  t he m et hod of encapsulat ion used by your I SP. Choices are PPP over  Et he rnet  ( PPPoE) , I P over Et her net  and Br idging.Enter  Service DescriptionSpecify a nam e for t his connect ion or use t he aut om at ically generat ed one.Rate  Lim it Enter the m axim um  transm ission rat e in Kbps for traffic sent  t hrough t he WAN connect ion. Ot herwise, leave t his field blank t o disable t he rat e lim it .This field is not  available for an ATM connect ion if QoS is disabled in the DSL ATM I nterface Configurat ion.Tag VLAN I D for egress packet s Select t his option t o add t he VLAN tag (specified below) t o t he out going traffic through t his connection.This field is available when the layer- 2 interface is in VLAN M UX m ode.Enter 802.1P Prior ityI EEE 802.1p defines up t o 8 separat e t raffic types by insert ing a t ag into a MAC-layer fram e that  cont ains bits t o define class of service. Type t he I EEE 802.1p priorit y level ( from  0 t o 7) t o add to t raffic through t his connection. The gr eater t he num ber, t he higher the priorit y  level.This field is available when the layer- 2 interface is in VLAN M UX m ode.Enter 802.1Q VLAN I DTy pe t he VLAN I D number ( from  1 to 4094) for  t raffic through t his connect ion.This field is available when the PTM int er face is in VLAN MU X m ode.
 Chapter 4 WANBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 874.4.1.3  WAN IP Address and DNS ServerThe screen differs by the encapsulat ion you select ed in t he previous screen. See Sect ion 4.6 on page 99 for m ore inform at ion. PPPoE or PPPoAThis screen displays when you select PPP ove r Et her ne t  ( PPPoE)  in the W AN  Service Con fig ur a t io n scr een or set  t he DSL link t ype t o PPPoA for the ATM inter face and configure a WAN connect ion using t he ATM interface.Network Pr ot ocol Select ionSelect  I Pv4  Only to have t he VDSL Router use only I Pv4.Select  I Pv4 & I Pv 6 ( Dua l St ack )  t o let  the VDSL Rout er connect  to I Pv4 and I Pv6 net wor ks an choose t he prot ocol for applicat ions accor ding to t he address type. This let s t he VDSL Router use an I Pv6 addr ess when sending t raffic through this connect ion. You can only select this for a WAN service that uses the PPPoE or I PoE encapsulat ion m ethod over  t he ATM or PTM int erface.Back Click this but ton to ret urn t o the previous screen.Next Click this but ton to cont inue.Table 19   WAN Configuration:  Service TypeLABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 4 WANBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide88Figure 24   WAN Configurat ion:  PPPoEThe following t able describes t he labels in t his screen. Table 20   WAN Configuration:  PPPoE or PPPoALABEL DESCRIPTIONPPP Username Enter  t he user nam e exactly as your I SP assigned. I f assigned a nam e in the form  user @dom ain w here dom ain ident ifies a ser v ice nam e, t hen ent er both com ponent s exact ly as given.PPP Password Enter t he password associat ed wit h t he user name above.PPPoE Service Nam eType t he nam e of your PPPoE service here.This field is not  available for a PPPoA connect ion.
 Chapter 4 WANBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 89Aut hent icat ion Met hodThe VDSL Rout er supports PAP (Password Aut hent ication Protocol) and CHAP ( Challenge Handshake Aut hent ication Pr otocol). CHAP is m ore secure than PAP;  however, PAP is readily available on m ore plat form s.Use the drop-down list  box t o select  an aut hent icat ion protocol for out going calls. Options are:AUTO -  Your VDSL Router accept s eit her  CHAP or PAP when requested by t his rem ot e node. PAP -  Your VDSL Rout er  accept s PAP only. CH AP  -  Your VDSL Rout er accept s CHAP only. M SCH AP  -  Your VDSL Rout er accepts MSCHAP only. MS-CHAP is the Microsoft  version of t he CHAP.Enable NAT Select t his check  box  t o act ivat e NAT on t his connect ion.Enable Fullcone NAT This field is available only  w hen you select  Ena ble  N AT. Select  t his check box t o act ivat e full cone NAT on t his connect ion.Dial on Dem and Select  this check box t o not  keep t he connect ion up all t he t im e. Specify  an idle t im e-out  in the I nact ivit y Tim eout  field.I nact ivity Tim eoutSpecify an idle t im e- out  when you select  Dial on De m a nd. The default  set ting is 0, which m eans the I nternet session will not t im eout .PPP  I P ext ension Select t his only if your service provider  r equires it. PPP I P ext ension ext ends the service provider ’s I P subnet  to a single LAN com puter.• I t let s only one com puter on the LAN connect  t o the WAN.• The public I P address fr om  t he I SP is forwarded through DHCP to t he LAN com put er  inst ead of being used on the WAN PPP int erface.• I t disables NAT and the fir ewall.• DHCP tells the LAN com put er to use t he gat eway as the default  gateway and DNS ser ver.• The VDSL Rout er bridges I P packet s bet ween t he WAN and LAN port s except  packet s dest ined for the VDSL Router’s LAN I P addr ess.Use Static I Pv4 AddressSelect  this option if you have a fixed I Pv4 address assigned by  your I SP.I Pv4 Addr ess Enter t he I Pv4 address assigned by your  I SP.Use Static I Pv6 AddressSelect  this option if you have a fixed I Pv6 address assigned by  your I SP.I Pv6 Addr ess Enter t he I Pv6 address assigned by your  I SP.Enable I Pv6 Unnum bered Model Select  th is t o enable I Pv6 pr ocessing on t h e int erface wit hout  assigning an explicit  I Pv6 addr ess to t he int erface. Launch Dhcp6c for Address Assignm ent Select  t his check box to obt ain an I Pv6 address from  a DHCPv6 server.The I P address assigned by a DHCPv6 server has prior ity over  t he I P address automatically generated by  t he VDSL Router using the I Pv6 prefix from  an RA.Enable PPP Debug ModeSelect   t his option to display PPP debugging messages on the console.Table 20   WAN Configuration:  PPPoE or PPPoALABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 4 WANBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide90IPoEThis screen displays when you select I P over Ethernet  in t he W AN Ser vice Con figur at ion screen.Br idge PPPoE Frames Bet ween WAN and Local Port sSelect  this option t o forward PPPoE packet s from  the WAN port  to t he LAN port s and from  the LAN ports to the WAN port.I n addit ion t o the VDSL Rout er's built- in PPPoE client , you can select this to allow up t o ten host s on the LAN t o use PPPoE client soft ware on t heir com puter s to connect t o the I SP via the VDSL Router. Each host  can have a separat e account  and a public WAN I P addr ess. This is an alternat ive to NAT for  applicat ion where NAT is not  appropriat e.Clear t his if you do not  need to allow  host s on t he LAN t o use PPPoE client soft ware on their com puters to connect  t o the I SP.This field is not  available for a PPPoA connect ion.Enable I GMP Mult icast ProxySelect  t h is ch eck  box  t o h av e t he VDSL Rout er  act  as an I GMP pr ox y on  t his con nect ion.  This allow s the VDSL Router to get  subscribing infor m ation and m aintain a j oined m em ber list  for  each m ult icast  group. I t can reduce m ult icast  traffic significant ly.Enable MLD Mult icast ProxySelect  Enable to have t he VDSL Rout er act as an MLD proxy  on t his connect ion.  This allows the VDSL Rout er t o get  subscript ion inform at ion and m aint ain a joined m em ber list for each m ulticast  group.  I t  can reduce m ult icast t raffic significant ly.Back Click this but ton t o ret urn to t he previous screen.Next Click this butt on to cont inue.Table 20   WAN Configuration:  PPPoE or PPPoALABEL DESCRIPTION
 Chapter 4 WANBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 91Figure 25   WAN Configurat ion:  I PoE The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen. Table 21   WAN Configuration:  I PoE LABEL DESCRIPTIONObtain an I P address autom aticallyA st at ic I P address is a fixed I P that  your I SP gives you. A dynam ic I P address is not fixed;  t he I SP assigns you a different  one each tim e you connect t o the I nt ernet . Select  this if you have a dy nam ic I P address.Option 60 Vendor I DDHCP Option 60 ident ifies t he vendor and funct ionality of the VDSL Rout er in DHCP request s that  t he VDSL Rout er sends to a DHCP server when get ting a WAN I P addr ess. Enter t he Vendor Class I dent ifier ( Option 60) , such as the type of the hardware or  firm war e.Option 61 I AI D DHCP Option 61 ident ifies the VDSL Router in DHCP request s t he VDSL Rout er sends t o a DHCP ser ver when get ting a WAN I P address. Enter t he I dentity Association I dent ifier ( I AI D)  of the VDSL Rout er . For  exam ple, t he WAN connect ion index  num ber.Option 61 DUI D Enter  t he DHCP Unique I dent ifier ( DUI D) of the VDSL Rout er.
Chapter 4 WANBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide92IPoAThis screen displays only when you set  t he DSL link t ype to I PoA for t he ATM interface and configure a WAN connect ion using the ATM int erface.Figure 26   WAN Configurat ion:  I PoA The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen. Option 125 Enable this t o add vendor specific inform at ion to DHCP request s that  the VDSL Router sends t o a DHCP server when get ting a WAN I P address.Use t he follow ing St at ic I P addressSelect  this if you have a static I P address.WAN I P Address Ent er t he static I P address pr ov ided by your I SP.WAN Su bnet  MaskEnter  t he subnet  m ask prov ided by your I SP.WAN gat eway I P Addr essEnter  t he gateway I P address provided by your I SP.Obtain an I Pv6 address autom atically Select  this option to have t he VDSL Rout er use t he I Pv 6 prefix from  the connect ed router ’s Rout er  Advertisem ent ( RA)  t o generat e an I Pv6 address. Dhcpv6 Address Assignm ent  Select  t his check box to obt ain an I Pv6 address from  a DHCPv6 server.The I P address assigned by a DHCPv6 server has prior ity over  t he I P address automatically generated by  t he VDSL Router using the I Pv6 prefix from  an RA.Use t he follow ing St at ic I Pv6 addr essSelect  this option if you have a fixed I Pv6 address assigned by  your I SP.WAN I Pv 6 Addr ess/ Prefix LengthEnter t he static I Pv6 address and bit num ber of the I Pv6 subnet m ask provided by your I SP.WAN I Pv 6 Subnet Prefix LengthEnter  t he bit  num ber of the I Pv6 subnet  m ask provided by your I SP.WAN Next- Hop I Pv6 AddressEnter  t he gateway I Pv6 address provided by your I SP.Back Click this but ton t o ret urn to t he previous screen.Next Click this butt on to cont inue.Table 22   WAN Configuration:  I PoA LABEL DESCRIPTIONWAN I P Addr ess Enter t he st at ic I P address pr ovided by your I SP.WAN Subnet Mask Enter t he subnet  m ask prov ided by your I SP.Table 21   WAN Configuration:  I PoE LABEL DESCRIPTION
 Chapter 4 WANBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 934.4.1.4  NAT, IGMP Multicast and Firewall ActivationThe screen is available only when you select  I P ove r  Et he rnet in the W AN  Service  Con fig ur a t io n scr een or set  t he DSL link t ype t o I PoA for the ATM interface and configure a WAN connect ion using t he ATM interface.Figure 27   WAN Configurat ion:  NAT, I GMP Multicast and Firewall Activat ion:  I PoE/ I PoAThe following t able describes t he labels in t his screen. 4.4.1.5  Default GatewayThe screen is not  available when you select  Bridging in t he W AN Ser vice Configur a tion  screen.Back Click this but ton t o ret urn to t he previous screen.Next Click this butt on to cont inue.Table 22   WAN Configuration:  I PoA LABEL DESCRIPTIONTable 23   WAN Configuration:  NAT, I GMP Multicast and Firewall Act ivation:  I PoELABEL DESCRIPTIONEnable NAT Select t his check  box  t o act ivat e NAT on t his connect ion.Enable Fullcone NAT Select  t his check box  t o act ivat e full cone NAT on t his connect ion.This field is available only w hen you select  Ena ble N AT.Enable I GMP Mult icast ProxySelect  this check box to have the VDSL Rout er  act  as an I GMP proxy on this connect ion. This allows t he VDSL Rout er t o get  subscribing inform ation and m aint ain a j oined m em ber list  for each m ult icast  group. I t  can reduce m ulticast  traffic significantly.Enable MLD Mult icast ProxySelect  Enable to have t he VDSL Rout er act as an MLD pr oxy on t his connect ion.  This allows the VDSL Rout er to get  subscr iption infor m at ion and m aint ain a joined m ember list for each m ulticast  group.  I t  can reduce m ult icast  traffic significant ly.Back Click this but ton t o ret urn to t he previous screen.Next Click this butt on to cont inue.
Chapter 4 WANBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide94Figure 28   WAN Configuration:  Default  Gat eway:  PPPoE, PPPoA, I PoE or I PoA The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen. 4.4.1.6  DNS Server The screen is not  available when you select  Bridging in t he W AN Ser vice Configur a tion  screen.Note:  I f you configure only one I PoA or I PoE connect ion using the ATM interface on t he VDSL Router, you m ust  enter the st atic DNS server address.Table 24   WAN Configuration:  Default  Gateway:  PPPoE or I PoELABEL DESCRIPTIONSelect ed Default  Gat eway I nt er facesSelect  a WAN interface through which you want t o forwar d the t raffic.You can select m ult iple WAN inter faces for the dev ice t o t r y. The VDSL Router t ries the WAN int erfaces in the order  list ed and uses only t he default gat eway of t he first  WAN interface that  connect s;  there is no backup WAN funct ion. To change t he priority order rem ove t hem  all and add t hem  back in again. Av ailable Rout ed WAN I nterfacesThese are t he WAN int er faces you can select from .Select ed WAN I nterfaceSelect  a WAN interface through which t o forward I Pv6 t raffic.Back Click this but ton t o ret urn to t he previous screen.Next Click this butt on to cont inue.
 Chapter 4 WANBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 95Figure 29   WAN Configuration:  DNS Ser ver:  PPPoE, PPPoA, I PoE or I PoAThe following t able describes t he labels in t his screen. Table 25   WAN Configuration:  DNS Server:  PPPoE or I PoELABEL DESCRIPTIONSelect  DNS Server I nter face fr om  available WAN int erfacesSelect  this to have the VDSL Rout er  get  t he DNS server addresses from  one of the VDSL Router’s WAN interfaces. Select ed DNS Server I nter facesSelect  a WAN interface through which t o get  DNS ser ver addresses.You can select m ult iple WAN inter faces for the dev ice t o t ry. The VDSL Router t ries t he WAN int er faces in the or der list ed and uses only the DNS server  information of the first  WAN int er face that  connect s;  there is no backup WAN funct ion. To change the prior ity order rem ove t hem  all and add t hem  back in again.
Chapter 4 WANBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide964.4.1.7  Configuration SummaryThis read-only screen show s t he current WAN connect ion set t ings.Figure 30   WAN Configurat ion:  Configurat ion Sum m aryThe following t able describes t he labels in t his screen. Av ailable WAN I nter facesThese are t he WAN int er faces you can select from .Use t he follow ing St at ic DNS I P addressSelect  this to have the VDSL Rout er  use t he DNS server  addresses you configure m anually.Prim ar y DNS ser verEnter  t he first  DNS server address assigned by the I SP.Secondary DNS ser verEnter t he second DNS server  address assigned by the I SP.Obtain I Pv6 DNS info from  a WAN int erfaceSelect  this to have the VDSL Rout er  get  t he I Pv6 DNS server addresses from t he I SP aut om at ically.WAN I nterface selectedSelect  a WAN interface through which you want  t o obtain t he I Pv6 DNS related inform at ion.Use t he follow ing St at ic I Pv6 DNS addressSelect  this to have the VDSL Rout er  use the I Pv6 DNS server  addresses you configure m anually.Primary I Pv6 DNS ser verEnter  t he first  I Pv6 DNS server address assigned by the I SP.Secondary I Pv6 DNS ser verEnter t he second I Pv6 DNS server  address assigned by the I SP.Back Click this but ton t o ret urn to t he previous screen.Next Click this butt on to cont inue.Table 25   WAN Configuration:  DNS Server:  PPPoE or I PoELABEL DESCRIPTIONTable 26   WAN Configuration:  Configuration Sum m aryLABEL DESCRIPTIONConnect ion Type This is the encapsulat ion m et hod used by t his connect ion.NAT This show s whet her NAT is act ive or not  for  t his connect ion.Full Cone NAT This shows whet her full cone NAT is act ive or not  for t his connect ion.I GMP Mult icast This show s whet her I GMP m ult icasting is act ive or not  for t his connect ion.Quality Of Service This shows whether  QoS is act ive or not  for t his connect ion.
 Chapter 4 WANBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 974.5  The 3G Backup ScreenUse t his screen to configur e your 3G sett ings. Click Net w ork  >  W AN  >  3 G Back up. See Section 2.2 on page 20 for the supported 3G USB dongles.Note:  The actual dat a rat e you obtain varies depending t he 3G card you use, the signal st rengt h to t he service provider’s base st ation, and so on.I f t he signal st rengt h of a 3G netw ork is t oo low, the 3G card m ay switch to an available 2.5G or 2.75G net work. Refer to Sect ion 4.6 on page 99 for a com parison bet ween 2G, 2.5G, 2.75G and 3G wireless t echnologies.Figure 31   3G Backup Back Click this but ton t o ret urn to t he previous screen.Apply/ Save Click this but ton t o save your  changes.Table 26   WAN Configuration:  Configuration Sum m aryLABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 4 WANBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide98The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen. Table 27   3G BackupLABEL DESCRIPTIONEnable 3G Backup  Select  this option t o have t he VDSL Router use t he 3G connect ion as your WAN or a backup when the wired WAN connect ion fails.Car d Descr iption  This field displays the m anufacturer  and m odel nam e of your 3G card if you insert ed one in t he VDSL Router. Ot herwise, it displays N / A.3G St at us  This field displays:  •N oD e vice when no 3G card is insert ed, •Disabled when the 3G WAN is not  act ivat ed, •Up when the 3G connect ion is up, •Dow n when the 3G connect ion is down, •NoResponse  when t here is no response from  the inserted 3G card, •I n va lidPI N  if t he PI N code you entered in t he W AN  >  3 G Ba cku p screen is not  the right one for the 3G card you inser ted, •N e e dPU K if you enter t he PI N (Personal I dentificat ion Num ber)  code incorrect ly for three t im es and t he SI M card is blocked by your I SP, •DialFa il when the VDSL Rout er  fails t o dial up a 3G connect ion.• or I n validSI M  when the SI M card is dam aged or not  inser ted. Usernam e Type the user nam e ( of up to 70 ASCI I  print able charact er s)  given to you by your serv ice provider.Password Type the passw or d ( of up to 70 ASCI I  print able characters) associated w it h t he user  nam e abov e.Dial st ring Enter  t he phone num ber ( dial str ing)  used to dial up a connect ion to your ser vice provider ’s base st at ion. Your I SP should provide the phone num ber.For ex am ple, * 99#  is the dial st ring t o est ablish a GPRS or 3G connect ion in Ta i w a n .APN Ent er the APN (Access Point Nam e)  provided by your ser vice provider. Connect ions wit h different  APNs m ay provide different  ser vices (such as I nternet  access or  MMS ( Mult i- Media Messaging Service) ) and charge m et hod.You can ent er up to 31 ASCI I  pr intable charact ers. Spaces are allowed.Connection Select N aile d Up if you do not  want  the connect ion t o tim e out .Select  on  D em a nd if  you do not  want  the connect ion up all t he time and specify an idle time-out  in t he Ma x I dle  Tim eout field.Max I dle Tim eout  This value specifies the tim e in m inutes that  elapses before t he VDSL Router automatically disconnect s from  the I SP.0 m eans the I nternet session will not  tim eout.Obtain an I P Address Aut om at icallySelect  this opt ion I f your I SP did not assign you a fixed I P address. Use t he follow ing st at ic I P addressSelect  this opt ion I f the I SP assigned a fixed I P address. I P Addr ess Enter your WAN I P address in this field if you selected Use t he follow ing st at ic I P addr ess. Obtain DNS info dynam ically  Select  this to have the VDSL Rout er get the DNS server  addresses from  the I SP automatically. Use t he follow ing st atic DNS I P addressSelect  this to have the VDSL Rout er use t he DNS server addresses you configure m anually.Prim ar y DNS ser verEnter  t he first  DNS server address assigned by the I SP.
 Chapter 4 WANBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 994.6  Technical ReferenceThe following sect ion contains addit ional t echnical inform at ion about  the VDSL Router features described in t his chapt er.EncapsulationBe sure t o use t he encapsulat ion met hod required by you r  I SP.  The VDSL Rout er  can  wor k  in bridge m ode or routing m ode. When t he VDSL Router is in routing m ode, it support s the following m et hods.IP over Ethernet I P over Et hernet  ( I PoE) is an alt ernative t o PPPoE. I P packets are being delivered across an Et hernet net work, wit hout using PPP encapsulat ion. They are rout ed bet ween t he Ethernet int erface and the WAN int erface and t hen form atted so that t hey can be underst ood in a bridged environm ent . For inst ance, it  encapsulat es routed Et hernet  fram es int o bridged Et hernet  cells. PPP over ATM (PPPoA)PPPoA st ands for Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adapt at ion Layer 5 (AAL5) . A PPPoA connect ion funct ions like a dial- up I nt ernet connect ion. The VDSL Router encapsulates the PPP session based on RFC1483 and sends it t hrough an ATM PVC (Perm anent Virt ual Circuit)  t o the I nternet  Service Provider ’s ( I SP) DSLAM ( digital access m ultiplexer). Please refer to RFC 2364 for m ore inform at ion on PPPoA. Refer to RFC 1661 for m or e inform ation on PPP.PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE)Point-t o-Point Protocol over Et hernet  (PPPoE) provides access contr ol and billing functionality in a m anner sim ilar to dial-up services using PPP. PPPoE is an I ETF st andard ( RFC 2516) specifying how a personal com puter (PC) interact s with a broadband m odem  (DSL, cable, wireless, et c.)  connect ion. For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication m et hod t hat  works with exist ing access control syst em s (for exam ple RADI US) .One of t he benefits of PPPoE is t he ability to let you access one of m ultiple net work services, a funct ion known as dynam ic service select ion. This enables t he service provider to easily create and offer new  I P services for individuals.Operationally, PPPoE saves significant  effort for bot h you and t he I SP or carrier, as it requires no specific configurat ion of the broadband m odem  at t he custom er sit e.Secondary DNS ser verEnter t he second DNS server  address assigned by the I SP.Apply Click Apply to save your changes back t o the VDSL Rout er.Cancel Click Ca nce l t o ret ur n t o the previous configuration.Table 27   3G Backup ( continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 4 WANBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide100By im plem ent ing PPPoE direct ly on the VDSL Rout er ( rather  than individual com puters) , t he com puters on t he LAN do not need PPPoE soft ware installed, since t he VDSL Router does t hat  part  of t he t ask. Furt herm ore, with NAT, all of the LANs’ com puters will have access.RFC 1483RFC 1483 describes t wo m et hods for Mult iprot ocol Encapsulat ion over ATM Adapt at ion Layer 5 ( AAL5) . The first  m et hod allows m ultiplexing of m ult iple protocols over a single ATM virt ual circuit ( LLC- based m ultiplexing) and the second m ethod assum es that each protocol is carried over a separat e ATM virt ual circuit ( VC- based m ultiplexing). Please refer t o RFC 1483 for m or e det ailed inform at ion.MultiplexingThere are t wo conventions to identify what  protocols the virtual circuit  ( VC) is carrying. Be sure to use t he m ultiplexing m et hod required by your I SP.VC- based Mult iplexingI n this case, by prior m ut ual agreem ent , each prot ocol is assigned to a specific virtual circuit;  for exam ple, VC1 car ries I P, etc. VC- based m ultiplexing m ay be dom inant  in environm ent s where dynam ic creat ion of large num bers of ATM VCs is fast  and econom ical.LLC- based MultiplexingI n t his case one VC carries m ultiple prot ocols with prot ocol identifying inform at ion being cont ained in each packet  header. Despite t he extra bandw idt h and processing overhead, t his m et hod m ay be advant ageous if it is not pract ical to have a separat e VC for each carried protocol, for exam ple, if charging heavily depends on t he num ber of sim ult aneous VCs.Traffic ShapingTraffic Shaping is an agreem ent  bet ween t he carrier and t he subscriber to regulate the average rat e and fluct uat ions of data t ransm ission over an ATM net work. This agreem ent  helps elim inat e congest ion, which is im port ant  for transm ission of real tim e dat a such as audio and video connect ions.Peak Cell Rate ( PCR)  is t he m axim um  rate at  which t he sender can send cells. This param et er m ay be lower (but  not  higher) than t he m axim um  line speed. 1 ATM cell is 53 bytes ( 424 bit s) , so a m axim um  speed of 832Kbps gives a m aximum  PCR of 1962 cells/ sec. This rat e is not  guarant eed because it is dependent  on t he line speed.Sust ained Cell Rat e ( SCR) is the m ean cell rate of each burst y traffic source. I t  specifies the m axim um  average rat e at which cells can be sent over t he virtual connect ion. SCR m ay not be greater than t he PCR.Maxim um  Burst  Size ( MBS)  is t he m axim um  num ber of cells t hat  can be sent  at  t he PCR. After MBS is reached, cell rat es fall below SCR unt il cell rate averages to t he SCR again. At this t im e, more cells (up t o the MBS)  can be sent  at  the PCR again.I f the PCR, SCR or MBS is set  t o t he default of "0", the syst em  will assign a m axim um  value that  correlat es t o your upst ream  line rate.
 Chapter 4 WANBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 101The following figure illust rat es the relat ionship bet ween PCR, SCR and MBS. Figure 32   Exam ple of Traffic ShapingATM Traffic ClassesThese are the basic ATM t raffic classes defined by t he ATM Forum  Traffic Managem ent  4.0 Specification. Constant  Bit Rate ( CBR)Const ant  Bit  Rate ( CBR) provides fixed bandwidt h t hat  is always available even if no dat a is being sent. CBR traffic is generally tim e- sensitive ( doesn't t olerate delay) . CBR is used for connect ions that  cont inuously require a specific am ount  of bandwidt h. A PCR is specified and if traffic exceeds this rat e, cells m ay be dropped. Examples of connect ions t hat  need CBR would be high- resolut ion video and voice.Variable Bit Rat e ( VBR) The Variable Bit Rat e ( VBR) ATM t raffic class is used with burst y connections. Connections that  use the Variable Bit Rat e ( VBR) traffic class can be grouped int o real tim e (VBR-RT)  or non-real tim e ( VBR-nRT)  connect ions. The VBR- RT ( real-t im e Variable Bit Rat e)  t ype is used wit h burst y connect ions that require closely controlled delay and delay variat ion. I t  also provides a fixed am ount  of bandwidth ( a PCR is specified)  but is only available when data is being sent . An exam ple of an VBR-RT connect ion would be video conferencing. Video conferencing requires real- t im e dat a t ransfers and t he bandwidth requirem ent varies in proport ion to the video im age's changing dynam ics. The VBR- nRT ( non real-tim e Variable Bit  Rate)  t ype is used with bursty connect ions t hat  do not  require closely controlled delay and delay variat ion. I t is com m only used for "burst y" t raffic typical on LANs. PCR and MBS define t he burst levels, SCR defines the m inim um  level. An exam ple of an VBR- nRT connect ion would be non-t im e sensitive dat a file t ransfers.Unspecified Bit Rat e ( UBR)The Unspecified Bit Rat e ( UBR) ATM t raffic class is for bursty dat a t ransfers. However, UBR doesn't  guarant ee any bandwidt h and only delivers traffic when t he net work has spare bandwidt h. An exam ple applicat ion is background file t ransfer.
Chapter 4 WANBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide102IP Address AssignmentA st at ic I P is a fixed I P t hat  your I SP gives you. A dynam ic I P is not  fixed;  t he I SP assigns you a different  one each t im e. The Single User Account  feat ure can be enabled or disabled if you have either a dynam ic or st atic I P. However the encapsulat ion m et hod assigned influences your  choices for I P address and default gat eway.Introduction to VLANs A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN)  allows a physical network t o be part itioned int o m ult iple logical net works. Devices on a logical net work belong to one gr oup. A device can belong to m ore t han one group. With VLAN, a device cannot direct ly talk to or hear  from  devices t hat  are not in the sam e group( s) ;  the traffic m ust  first  go through a router.I n Multi-Tenant  Unit ( MTU)  applications, VLAN is vital in providing isolat ion and security am ong t he subscribers. When properly configured, VLAN prevent s one subscriber from  accessing t he net work resources of another on the same LAN, t hus a user will not see t he printers and hard disks of another user  in the sam e building. VLAN also increases net work perform ance by lim iting broadcast s t o a sm aller and m ore m anageable logical broadcast  dom ain. I n t raditional sw it ched environm ent s, all broadcast  packet s go t o each and every individual port. With VLAN, all broadcast s are confined t o a specific broadcast  dom ain. Introduction to IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN A t agged VLAN uses an explicit  t ag ( VLAN I D)  in t he MAC header  to ident ify the VLAN m em bership of a fram e across bridges - they are not confined to the switch on which they were created. The VLANs can be creat ed st at ically by hand or dynam ically through GVRP. The VLAN I D associat es a fram e wit h a specific VLAN and provides t he inform at ion t hat  switches need t o process t he fram e across t he net work. A t agged fram e is four bytes longer than an unt agged fram e and contains two bytes of TPI D ( Tag Prot ocol I dent ifier ), residing within the t ype/ lengt h field of t he Ethernet  fram e) and two byt es of TCI (Tag Cont rol I nform at ion) , st arts aft er t he source address field of the Ethernet  fram e). The CFI  ( Canonical Form at  I ndicat or)  is a single- bit  flag, always set t o zero for Et hernet  sw it ches. I f a fram e received at an Et hernet port has a CFI  set  to 1, t hen that  fram e should not  be forwarded as it  is t o an unt agged port. The rem aining t welve bits define the VLAN I D, giving a possible m axim um  num ber of 4,096 VLANs. Note t hat user priorit y and VLAN I D are independent of each ot her. A fram e wit h VI D (VLAN I dentifier) of null (0)  is called a priority fram e, m eaning t hat only t he priority level is significant  and the default VI D of the ingress port is given as t he VI D of the fram e. Of the 4096 possible VI Ds, a VI D of 0 is used t o ident ify priorit y fram es and value 4095 ( FFF)  is reserved, so the m axim um  possible VLAN configurat ions are 4,094. TPI D 2 BytesUser Priority 3 Bit sCFI1 BitVLAN I D12 Bit s
 Chapter 4 WANBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 103MulticastI P packet s are transm it t ed in either one of t wo ways -  Unicast  (1 sender - 1 recipient) or Broadcast ( 1 sender - everybody on t he net work) . Mult icast delivers I P packets to a group of host s on t he net work -  not  everybody and not  j ust  1. I nt ernet  Group Multicast  Protocol ( I GMP)  is a network-layer prot ocol used t o establish m em bership in a Mult icast  group -  it  is not used to carry user data. I GMP version 2 (RFC 2236)  is an im provem ent  over version 1 (RFC 1112) but  I GMP version 1 is st ill in wide use. I f you would like t o read m ore detailed inform ation about int eroperability bet ween I GMP version 2 and ver sion 1, please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236. The class D I P address is used t o ident ify host  groups and can be in t he range 224.0.0.0 t o 239.255.255.255. The address 224.0.0.0 is not  assigned t o any group and is used by I P m ulticast  com puters. The address 224.0.0.1 is used for query m essages and is assigned t o t he perm anent  group of all I P host s ( including gat eways) . All host s m ust  j oin the 224.0.0.1 gr oup in order t o participat e in I GMP. The address 224.0.0.2 is assigned t o t he m ulticast routers group. At  st art up, the VDSL Rout er  queries all direct ly connected net works to gat her group m em bership. Aft er that, t he VDSL Router periodically updates this inform ation.DNS Server Address AssignmentUse Dom ain Nam e Syst em  ( DNS)  to m ap a dom ain name to its corresponding I P address and vice versa, for inst ance, t he I P address of www.zyxel.com  is 204.217.0.2. The DNS server is extrem ely im port ant  because without it , you m ust  know the I P address of a com puter before you can access it . The VDSL Rout er can get  the DNS server addresses in t he following ways.1The I SP t ells you t he DNS server addresses, usually in the form  of an inform at ion sheet, when you sign up. I f your I SP gives you DNS server addresses, m anually enter t hem  in the DNS server fields.2I f your I SP dynam ically assigns t he DNS server I P addresses ( along with t he VDSL Router’s WAN I P address) , set  the DNS server fields to get  the DNS server  address from  the I SP.IPv6 AddressingThe 128- bit  I Pv6 address is writ ten as eight  16- bit  hexadecimal blocks separat ed by colons ( : ) . This is an exam ple I Pv6 address 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000.I Pv6 addr esses can be abbreviated in tw o ways:• Leading zeros in a block can be om it t ed. So 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 can be written as 2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0. • Any num ber of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double colon can only appear once in an I Pv6 address. So 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015 can be writ ten as 2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015, 2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15 or 2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15.IPv6 Prefix and Prefix LengthSim ilar to an I Pv4 subnet  m ask, I Pv6 uses an address prefix to represent  t he net work address. An I Pv6 prefix lengt h specifies how m any m ost  significant  bit s ( st art from  t he left) in the address
Chapter 4 WANBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide104com pose t he net work address. The prefix lengt h is writt en as “ / x”  where x is a num ber. For exam ple, 2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32m eans that  the first  32 bit s ( 2001:db8) is t he subnet  prefix.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 105CHAPTER   5LAN Setup5.1  OverviewA Local Area Network (LAN)  is a shared com m unication syst em  t o which m any networking devices are connect ed. I t is usually locat ed in one im m ediat e area such as a building or floor of a building.Use t he LAN screens to help you configure a LAN DHCP server and m anage I P addresses.5.1.1  What You Can Do in this Chapter• Use the LAN Set up scr een t o set t he LAN I P address, subnet  m ask, and DHCP sett ings of your VDSL Rout er  ( Sect ion 5.2 on page 106) .• Use the St a t ic DHCP screen t o assign I P addresses on t he LAN t o specific individual com puters based on their MAC Addresses (Sect ion 5.2.1 on page 108). • Use the I Pv6  Aut oconfig screen t o set  t he Local Area Network int erface I Pv6 sett ings (Section 5.3 on page 109) .DSLLAN
Chapter 5 LAN SetupBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide1065.1.2  What You Need To KnowIP AddressI P addresses ident ify individual devices on a net work. Every net working device (including com puters, servers, rout ers, print ers, etc.)  needs an I P address to com m unicate across t he net work. These net working devices are also known as hosts.Subnet MaskSubnet  m asks det erm ine t he m axim um number of possible hosts on a netw ork. You can also use subnet  m asks t o divide one net work int o m ultiple sub-networks.DHCPA DHCP ( Dynam ic Host Configurat ion Prot ocol) server can assign your VDSL Router an I P address, subnet  m ask, DNS and ot her rout ing infor m at ion when it's turned on.DNSDNS ( Dom ain Nam e Syst em ) is for m apping a dom ain nam e t o its corresponding I P address and vice ver sa. The DNS server is extrem ely im port ant  because w it hout it, you m ust  know t he I P address of a networking device before you can access it .RADVD (Router Advertisement Daemon)When an I Pv6 host  sends a Router Solicitation ( RS)  request  to discover the available rout ers, RADVD wit h Router Advert isem ent  ( RA)  m essages in response t o the request . I t specifies t he m inim um  and m axim um  int ervals of RA broadcast s. RA m essages cont aining t he address prefix. I Pv6 host s can be generated wit h the I Pv6 prefix an I Pv6 address.Finding Out MoreSee Sect ion 5.4 on page 111 for technical background infor m at ion on LANs.5.1.3  Before You BeginFind out t he MAC addresses of your net work devices if you intend to add t hem  to the DHCP Client List  screen.5.2  The LAN Setup ScreenClick Adva nce d Se tup >  LAN to open the LAN Se t up screen. Use t his screen to set t he Local Area Network int erface sett ings.
 Chapter 5 LAN SetupBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 107Figure 33   LAN SetupThe following t able describes t he fields in this screen.  Table 28   LAN Set upLABEL DESCRIPTIONI P Address Enter  t he LAN I P address t o assign t o your  VDSL Rout er  in dot t ed decim al not ation, for  exam ple, 192.168.1.1 (fact ory default) . Subnet  Mask  Type t he subnet  m ask of your net work in dotted decim al notation, for exam ple 255.255.255.0 (fact ory default ). Your VDSL Router autom at ically com putes t he subnet  mask based on the I P Address you ent er, so do not  change t his field unless you are inst ructed to do so.
Chapter 5 LAN SetupBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide1085.2.1  Add DHCP Static IP Lease ScreenClick Add Entries in t he LAN  Se t up scr een t o display the following screen.Enable I GMP Snooping Enable I GMP snooping to have t he VDSL Router passively  learn m em berships in m ult icast  groups.Select  St an dard Mode  t o have t he VDSL Rout er forwar d m ult icast  packet s t o a port that joins t he m ult icast  group and broadcast  unknow n m ult icast  packet s from  the WAN to all LAN ports.Select  Block in g M ode  t o have the VDSL Rout er block all unknown m ult icast packet s from  t he WAN.Disable DHCP Server Select  this to have the VDSL Router not  provide DHCP services. Users m ust configure LAN devices wit h m anual net wor k set tings if you do not  have anot her DHCP server on the net work.Enable DHCP Server Select t his to have t he VDSL Rout er  serve as the DHCP server for  t he net work to assign I P addresses and provide subnet  m ask, gat eway, and DNS server inform at ion to LAN devices.St art  I P Address This field specifies t he first  of the contiguous addresses in the I P address pool.End I P Address This field specifies t he last  of t he contiguous addresses in the I P address pool.DHCP Server Lease Tim eSpecify for how m any hours to assign an I P address to a LAN dev ice before m aking it  available for  reassignm ent  t o ot her  system s.St at ic I P Lease List Use this table t o assign I P addresses on the LAN to specific com puters based on their MAC Addresses. MAC Address The MAC ( Media Access Cont rol)  of a LAN device to w hich the ent ry’s I P address is assigned.I P Addr ess This field displays the I P address reserved for t he LAN device with the entr y ’s MAC. Rem ove Select  entr ies and click the Re m ove Ent r ie s button t o delet e t hem.Add Ent ries Click this butt on to creat e a new st atic I P lease entry.Obtain DNS info from  WANSelect t his to have the VDSL Rout er get  the Dom ain Nam e Syst em  (DNS)  server addr esses fr om  t he VDSL Rout er’s WAN inter face.Use Static DNS I P addressSelect  this to have the VDSL Rout er use the DNS server addresses you configure m anually.Fir st  DNS Server, Second DNS Ser verEnter  t he first  and second DNS (Dom ain Nam e Syst em )  server I P address t he VDSL Router passes to t he DHCP client s. Configure the second I P Address and Subnet  Mask for LAN int erface Select  t he check box t o use I P alias t o configure anot her  LAN net wor k for  t he VDSL Rou t er . I P alias partitions a physical net work int o different  logical net works over t he sam e Et hernet interface. The VDSL Rout er  suppor t s m ult iple logical LAN interfaces via it s physical Ethernet int er face wit h t he VDSL Rout er it self as the gat eway for the LAN net work. You can also configure firewall rules to cont rol access to t he LAN's logical net work ( subnet ).I P Addr ess Ent er  t he second LAN I P address of your VDSL Rout er in dot t ed decim al not at ion.Subnet Mask Ty pe t he subnet  mask of your net wor k in dot ted decim al notation, for exam ple 255.255.255.0 ( fact ory default ).Apply/ Save Click this but ton t o save your changes.Table 28   LAN Set up (cont inued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
 Chapter 5 LAN SetupBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 109Figure 34   Stat ic DHCP:  Add/ EditThe following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.5.3  The IPv6 LAN Auto Configuration ScreenClick Advanced Se t up >  LAN > I Pv6  Autoconfig to open the I Pv6  LAN Aut o Con figurat ion screen. Use t his screen to set  the Local Area Network int erface I Pv6 set t ings. Table 29   St at ic DHCP:  Add/ EditLABEL DESCRIPTIONMAC Address Enter t he MAC address of a com puter on your LAN.Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Cont rol)  address. The MAC address is assigned at t he fact ory and consist s of six  pairs of hexadecim al charact ers, for exam ple, 00: A0: C5: 00: 00: 02.I P Address Enter t he I P address t hat  you want to assign t o the com puter on your LAN wit h t he MAC address t hat  you w ill also specify.Apply/ Save Click t his butt on to save your changes and go back t o the previous screen.
Chapter 5 LAN SetupBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide110Figure 35   I Pv6 LAN Aut o Configurat ionThe following t able describes t he fields in this screen.  Table 30   I Pv6 LAN Aut o Configurat ionLABEL DESCRIPTIONI nter face Address  To use a st at ic I Pv6 address, ent er t he I Pv6 addr ess prefix and prefix length that  the VDSL Rout er uses for the LAN I Pv6 address.The I Pv6 prefix length specifies how many m ost significant bit s (st art ing from  the left )  in t he address com pose the net work addr ess. This field displays the bit  num ber of the I Pv6 subnet  m ask.Enable DHCPv6 Server Select t his to have t he VDSL Rout er act  as a DHCPv6 ser ver and pass I Pv6 addr esses, DNS ser ver  and dom ain nam e inform ation t o DHCPv6 client s.St at eless Select  this t o have t he VDSL Router use I Pv6 st at eless aut oconfigurat ion.
 Chapter 5 LAN SetupBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 111Network Co nnections: My Netw ork Places: Proper ties: Example5.4  Technical ReferenceThis sect ion provides some technical background inform at ion about  the topics covered in this chapt er.St at eful Select  t his t o have t he VDSL Rout er use I Pv6 stat eful autoconfiguration.St art  int er face I D:  specify the first  I Pv6 addr ess in the pool of addr esses that  can be assigned to DHCPv6 clients. End inte rface  I D:  specify the last  I Pv6 address in the pool of addresses t hat can be assigned to DHCPv6 clients. Le ase d Tim e ( hour ) :  Specify for how many hours t o assign an I Pv6 address to a DHCPv6 client  before m ak ing it available for reassignm ent t o ot her syst em s.Assign DNS servers by DHCPv6 Select  this to have t he VDSL Rout er pass DNS server inform ation t o DHCPv6 client s.Enable RADVD Select t his to have t he VDSL Rout er send r out er advertisem ent m essages t o t he LAN host s.Router advert isem ent  is a response t o a rout er solicitat ion or  a periodical m ult icast  advert isem ent  from a rout er to advert ise it s presence and other  param et ers, such as I Pv6 prefix  and DNS inform at ion. Router solicit at ion is a request from  a host  to locat e a rout er that  can act  as the default rout er and forward packets.Note: The LAN hosts neither generate global IPv6 addresses nor communicate with other networks if you disable this feature.Enable ULA Prefix Advertisem ent Select  this to send Unique Local I Pv6 Unicast  Addresses ( ULA)  advert isem ent  m essages t o the LAN host s.Random ly Generat e Select t his to aut om atically cr eate a LAN I Pv6 address prefix.St at ically Configure Select  this to send a fixed LAN I Pv6 address prefix. Prefix :  enter t he I Pv6 prefix and length the VDSL Rout er uses to generate t he LAN I Pv6 address. The prefix lengt h specifies how m any most significant  bit s (st arting from  the left)  in the address com pose t he netw ork address. This field displays the bit  num ber of the I Pv6 subnet  m ask.Prefe rre d Life Tim e  ( h our) :  enter t he preferr ed lifet im e for the prefix.Valid Life Tim e ( h ou r) :  ent er t he valid lifet im e for the prefix.Enable MLD Snooping  Select  t his to have t he VDSL Router check Multicast  List ener  Discovery ( MLD) packet s t o learn t he m ult icast  group m em bership. This helps reduce m ult icast  traffic.St andard Mode  Select t his to have t he VDSL Rout er forward m ult icast packet s t o a port  t hat j oins the m ult icast  group and broadcast unknown m ult icast  packet s from  t he WAN to all LAN port s.Block ing Mode  Select  this to have the VDSL Rout er block all unknown m ult icast  packet s from  the WAN.Save/ Apply Click this but ton to save your changes.Table 30   I Pv6 LAN Aut o Configurat ion ( continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 5 LAN SetupBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide1125.4.1  LANs, WANs and the VDSL RouterThe act ual physical connect ion determ ines whether the VDSL Router port s are LAN or WAN ports. There are t wo separate I P networks, one inside the LAN net work and the ot her outside the WAN net work as shown next.Figure 36   LAN and WAN I P Addresses5.4.2  DHCP SetupDHCP (Dynam ic Host  Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132)  allows individual clients to obt ain TCP/ I P configuration at  start -up from  a server. You can configure t he VDSL Router as a DHCP server or disable it . When configured as a server, the VDSL Router pr ovides the TCP/ I P configuration for the client s. I f you t urn DHCP service off, you m ust  have another  DHCP server on your LAN, or  else t he computer m ust  be m anually configured. IP Pool SetupThe VDSL Rout er is pre- configured with a pool of I P addresses for t he DHCP clients ( DHCP Pool) . See t he product  specificat ions in the appendices. Do not assign st at ic I P addresses from  t he DHCP pool to your LAN com puters.5.4.3  DNS Server Addresses DNS ( Dom ain Nam e Syst em ) m aps a dom ain nam e t o its corresponding I P address and vice versa. The DNS ser ver is extrem ely im portant because wit hout  it, you m ust know the I P address of a com puter before you can access it. The DNS server addresses you enter when you set  up DHCP are passed t o t he client  m achines along with the assigned I P address and subnet m ask.There are t wo ways t hat  an I SP dissem inat es t he DNS server addresses. • The I SP t ells you t he DNS server addresses, usually in the form  of an inform at ion sheet , when you sign up. I f your  I SP gives you DNS server  addresses, enter them  in t he DN S Ser ve r  fields in the DHCP Se t up screen.WANLAN
 Chapter 5 LAN SetupBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 113• Som e I SPs choose t o dissem inat e t he DNS server addresses using t he DNS server extensions of I PCP (I P Cont rol Protocol)  aft er the connection is up. I f your I SP did not  give you explicit  DNS servers, chances are the DNS servers ar e conveyed through I PCP negot iat ion. The VDSL Router supports t he I PCP DNS server extensions t hrough t he DNS proxy feat ure.Please note t hat DNS proxy w orks only when t he I SP uses t he I PCP DNS server extensions. I t does not m ean you can leave t he DNS servers out of t he DHCP set up under all circum st ances. I f your I SP gives you explicit  DNS server s, m ake sure t hat you ent er their I P addresses in t he DHCP Se t up scr een.5.4.4  LAN TCP/IP The VDSL Router has built- in DHCP server capability that  assigns I P addresses and DNS servers to syst em s t hat  support  DHCP client  capability.IP Address and Subnet MaskSim ilar to the way houses on a st reet  share a com mon street name, so too do com put ers on a LAN share one comm on network num ber.Wher e you obtain your net work num ber depends on your particular situation. I f t he I SP or your net work adm inist rat or assigns you a block of registered I P addresses, follow their inst ructions in select ing t he I P addresses and t he subnet  m ask.I f t he I SP did not explicitly give you an I P network number, t hen m ost likely you have a single user account  and t he I SP will assign you a dynam ic I P address when t he connect ion is est ablished. I f t his is t he case, it is recom m ended that you select a net work num ber from  192.168.0.0 t o 192.168.255.0 and you m ust  enable the Netw ork Addr ess Translat ion (NAT)  feat ure of the VDSL Router. The I nt ernet Assigned Num ber Authority (I ANA)  reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use;  please do not use any ot her num ber unless you are told otherwise. Let 's say you select 192.168.1.0 as t he net work num ber;  w hich covers 254 individual addresses, from  192.168.1.1 to 192.168.1.254 ( zero and 255 are reserved). I n ot her words, t he first  t hree number s specify the network num ber while t he last  num ber identifies an individual com put er on that net work.Once you have decided on t he net work num ber, pick an I P address t hat  is easy t o rem em ber, for inst ance, 192.168.1.1, for your VDSL Router, but  m ake sure that  no other device on your net work is using t hat  I P address.The subnet  m ask specifies the net work num ber portion of an I P address. Your VDSL Router will com pute t he subnet  m ask autom at ically based on t he I P address that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet  m ask com puted by t he VDSL Router unless you are inst ruct ed t o do ot herwise.Private IP AddressesEver y m achine on the I nternet  m ust have a unique address. I f your net works are isolated from  the I nt ernet , for exam ple, only between your two branch offices, you can assign any I P addr esses to the host s without  problem s. However, the I nt ernet  Assigned Num bers Aut horit y ( I ANA)  has reserved the following t hree blocks of I P addresses specifically for private net works:• 10.0.0.0     — 10.255.255.255• 172.16.0.0   — 172.31.255.255
Chapter 5 LAN SetupBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide114• 192.168.0.0 — 192.168.255.255You can obtain your I P address from  the I ANA, from an I SP or it can be assigned from  a privat e net work. I f you belong t o a sm all organizat ion and your I nternet access is through an I SP, the I SP can provide you with the I nternet  addresses for your local networks. On t he ot her  hand, if you are part  of a m uch larger organization, you should consult  your net work adm inist rat or for t he appropriate I P addresses.Note:  Regardless of your particular situat ion, do not create an arbit rary I P address;  always follow t he guidelines above. For m ore inform at ion on address assignm ent, please refer to RFC 1597, “Address Allocation for Privat e I nternet s”  and RFC 1466, “ Guidelines for Managem ent of I P Address Space”.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 115CHAPTER   6Network Address Translation (NAT)6.1  Overview This chapt er discusses how t o configure NAT on the VDSL Router.Network Address Translation ( NAT, RFC 1631)  is t he t ranslation of the I P address of a host  in a packet, for exam ple, t he source address of an outgoing packet, used within one net work t o a different  I P address known within another network. 6.1.1  What You Can Do in this Chapter• Use the Vir t ua l Servers screen t o forward incom ing service requests t o t he server(s)  on your local net work ( Sect ion 6.3 on page 115) .• Use the D MZ H ost  screen t o configure a default server  (Sect ion 6.4 on page 118) .6.2  What You Need to KnowThe following t erm s and concept s m ay help as you read t hrough this chapt er.NATI n the sim plest  form , NAT changes the source I P address in a packet received from a subscriber ( the inside local address)  t o anot her ( t he inside global address)  befor e forwarding t he packet t o t he WAN side. When t he response com es back, NAT translates t he dest inat ion address ( t he inside global address)  back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host .Virtual ServersA virt ual server set  is a list  of inside (behind NAT on the LAN)  servers, for exam ple, web or FTP, that  you can m ake visible to the out side world even though NAT m akes your  whole inside netw ork appear as a single com puter to the outside world.6.3  The Virtual Servers ScreenClick Advance d Setup >  N AT t o open the Virt ua l Se rver s screen. Use t his screen t o m anage the list  of virt ual ser ver rules.
Chapter 6 Network Address Translation (NAT)Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide116Note:  Many residential broadband I SP account s do not allow you t o run any server processes ( such as a Web or FTP server)  from  your location. Your I SP m ay periodically check for servers and m ay suspend your account  if it discovers any act ive services at your location. I f you are unsure, refer to your I SP.Figure 37   NAT Virt ual Servers The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen. 6.3.1  The Virtual Servers Add Screen This screen let s you create or edit a virtual server  rule. Click Add in the V irt ual Server s screen t o open t he following screen.You m ay ent er a single port num ber  or a range of port num bers t o be forwarded, and t he local I P address of t he desired server. The por t number  identifies a service;  for  exam ple, web service is on port  80 and FTP on port  21. I n som e cases, such as for unknown services or  where one server can support m ore t han one service ( for exam ple bot h FTP and web service), it m ight  be bet t er to specify a range of port num bers. You can allocat e a server I P address t hat  corresponds t o a port  or a range of ports.Table 31   NAT Virtual ServersLABEL DESCRIPTIONAdd Click this but ton t o cr eate a new entr y.Rem ove Select  ent ries and click the Re m ove  butt on to delet e them .Ser ver Nam e This field displays the nam e of the ser vice used by the packet s for this virt ual server. Ext ernal Por t St art  This is t he first  ext ernal port  num ber t hat identifies a service.Ext ernal Por t End This is t he last ext ernal port  num ber t hat ident ifies a serv ice.Protocol This show w het her t he virtual server applies t o TCP traffic, UDP t raffic, or both.I nter nal Port St artThis is t he first  inter nal port number that ident ifies a service.I nt er nal Port  En d    This is t he last int ernal port  num ber that identifies a ser vice.Ser ver I P AddressThis field displays the inside I P addr ess of t he server.WAN I nterface This field displays the WAN int erface through which the serv ice is forwarded.
 Chapter 6 Network Address Translation (NAT)Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 117Figure 38   Virtual Ser vers Add The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen. Table 32   Virtual Servers AddLABEL DESCRIPTIONUse I nt er face Select  a WAN int erface for which you want to configure a virtual server rules.Service Name Select  a Service:  use the drop- down list  to select  a service. Cust om  Service:  t ype a nam e to specify a different  service.Ser ver I P AddressEnter  t he inside I P address of the LAN device to w hich the virt ual server  for wards traffic.Ext ernal Por t St art  Enter  t he original dest ination port for the packet s.To forward only one port , ent er the por t num ber again in t he Ex te rna l En d Por t field. To forward a ser ies of port s, enter t he st art  port  num ber here and t he end port num ber in the Ext er nal End Por t field.
Chapter 6 Network Address Translation (NAT)Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide1186.4  The DMZ Host ScreenClick Advanced Se t up >  N AT >  DMZ H ost  to open t he D MZ H ost  screen. Use t his screen t o specify the I P address of a default server t o receive packet s from  ports not specified in t he Vir tua l Se rvers screen.Figure 39   DMZ Host  The following t able describes t he fields in this screen. Ext ernal Por t End Enter  t he last  port  of t he original dest inat ion port  range. To forward only one port , ent er the port  num ber in the Ex te rna l St ar t Port field above and t hen enter it again in this field. To forward a series of ports, enter t he last  port  num ber in a series that  begins wit h t he port num ber in t he Ex te rna l St art  Port  field above.Protocol Select  the prot ocol suppor ted by this virt ual server. Choices ar e TCP, UDP, or TCP/ UD P.I nter nal Port St artEnter  t he port  num ber here t o which you want  t he VDSL Rout er t o t ranslat e t he incom ing port . For a range of port s, ent er  t he first  num ber of the range t o which you want  t he incoming ports translat ed.I nt er nal Port  En d    Enter t he last  por t of t he translat ed por t range.Back Click Ba ck  to ret urn t o the previous screen.Apply Click Apply to save your changes back t o the VDSL Rout er.Cancel Click Ca nce l t o begin configuring t his screen afresh.Table 32   Virtual Servers Add ( continued)LABEL DESCRIPTIONTable 33   DMZ HostLABEL DESCRIPTIONDMZ Host  I P AddressEnter  t he I P address of the default  server which receives packet s from  ports that  are not  specified in the Virt ual Se rve rs screen. Note: If you do not assign a default server, the VDSL Router discards all packets received for ports not specified in the virtual server configuration.Save/ Apply Click  t his to save your changes back to t he VDSL Rout er.
 Chapter 6 Network Address Translation (NAT)Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 1196.5  Technical ReferenceThe following sect ion contains addit ional t echnical inform at ion about  the VDSL Router features described in t his chapt er.Virtual Server: Services and Port NumbersThe m ost  oft en used port  num bers are shown in t he following t able. Please refer t o RFC 1700 for further inform ation about port  num bers. Please also refer t o t he Support ing CD for m ore exam ples and det ails on port forwarding and NAT.Virtual Server ExampleLet 's say you want  to assign ports 21- 25 t o one FTP, Telnet  and SMTP server (A in t he exam ple) , port  80 t o another ( B in t he exam ple)  and assign a default server I P address of 192.168.1.35 t o a third ( C in t he exam ple) . You assign t he LAN I P addresses and the I SP assigns the WAN I P address. The NAT net work appears as a single host  on t he I nt ernet .Figure 40   Multiple Server s Behind NAT Exam pleTable 34   Services and Port Num bersSERVICES PORT NUMBERECHO 7FTP ( File Transfer  Prot ocol) 21SMTP ( Sim ple Mail Transfer Protocol) 25DNS ( Dom ain Nam e Syst em ) 53Finger 79HTTP ( Hy per Text  Transfer prot ocol or  WWW, Web) 80POP3 (Post  Office Prot ocol) 110NNTP (Net work News Transpor t Prot ocol) 119SNMP (Sim ple Network  Managem ent Protocol) 161SNMP trap 162PPTP (Point-t o- Point  Tunneling Prot ocol) 1723D=192.168.1.36192.168.1.1IP address assigned by ISPA=192.168.1.33B=192.168.1.34C=192.168.1.35
Chapter 6 Network Address Translation (NAT)Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide120
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 121CHAPTER   7Firewall7.1  Overview This chapt er shows you how t o enable and configure t he VDSL Rout er  firewall set t ings.The VDSL Router firewall is a packet filt ering firewall and restricts access based on t he source/dest ination com put er net work address of a packet  and t he t ype of application. 7.1.1  What You Can Do in this Chapter• Use the Genera l screen (Sect ion 7.2 on page 121)  t o enable firewall on t he VDSL Rout er, and set t he default act ion that t he firewall t akes on packets t hat  do not  m atch any of t he firewall rules.• Use the Rules screen ( Sect ion 7.3 on page 123)  to view t he configur ed firewall rules and add, edit  or rem ove a firewall r ule.7.2  The Firewall General Screen   Click Adva nced Se tup >  Firew all t o display the following screen. Activate t he firewall by select ing the Active Fire w a ll check box .Figure 41   Firewall General
Chapter 7 FirewallBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide122The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen. 7.2.1  Default Policy ConfigurationI n t he Fire w a ll Ge nera l screen, click Add or click an ent ry’s Edit  icon to configure a firewall policy.Figure 42   Firewall General:  AddThe following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.Table 35   Firewall GeneralLABEL DESCRIPTIONActive Firewall Select  this check box t o act ivat e the firewall. The VDSL Router perfor m s access cont rol and prot ect s against  Denial of Service ( DoS)  att acks when the firewall is act ivat ed.No. This displays the index num ber  of t he default  fir ewall policy.Act ive This field displays whet her a policy is turned on or  not . Select t he check box to enable t he policy. Clear t he check box t o disable t he policy.Nam e This displays t he nam e of the policy.I nterface This displays the LAN or WAN int erface(s)  to which this policy is applied.Direction This displays t he dir ect ion of t ravel of packets (I n and Ou t ) .Firewall rules ar e grouped based on the direct ion of t ravel of packet s to which they  apply. Default Act ion This displays the default act ion that  the firewall is to t ake on packet s t hat are t raveling in the select ed dir ection and do not  m at ch any of the fir ewall r ules. Dr op:  the VDSL Router silently discards t he packets without  sending a TCP reset packet  or an I CMP dest ination-unreachable m essage to t he sender.Per m it :  t he VDSL Rout er allows t he passage of the packet s.Rem ove Select  ent ries and click t he Rem ove butt on to delete t hem .Edit Click the Edit but ton t o go t o the screen wher e you can edit  the rule.Add Click Add to create a new policy.Apply Click Apply to save your changes back  t o t he VDSL Rout er.Table 36   Firewall General:  AddLABEL DESCRIPTIONAct ive  Select t his check box t o enable the rule.Nam e Ent er a descript ive nam e using printable English keyboar d charact er s.
 Chapter 7 FirewallBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 1237.3  The Firewall Rules ScreenNote:  The ordering of your rules is very im port ant as rules are applied in turn.Click Advan ce d Setup >  Firew all >  Rules t o display the following screen. This screen list s the configured incom ing or out going firewall rules. Note the order in which t he rules are list ed.Note:  The firewall rules t hat you configure here take priority over the general firewall act ion settings in the Ge neral screen.I nterface Select  All to apply the policy to all interfaces on the VDSL Rout er  or select the specific LAN or  WAN int er face to which this policy applies. Direction Specify the direct ion of travel of packet s ( in com ing or  out going)  in this policy.Default  Act ionSpecify whet her t he firewall silently discards packet s (D rop) or allows the passage of packet s (Per m i t ) .Back Click Ba ck  to ret urn t o the previous screen.Apply Click Apply to save your cust om ized sett ings and exit this screen.Table 36   Firewall General:  Add ( continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 7 FirewallBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide124Figure 43   Firewall Rules The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.  Table 37   Firewall RulesLABEL DESCRIPTIONI ncom ing/Outgoing RulesThe following fields sum m ar ize t he rules you have cr eated that  apply t o t raffic traveling in the selected packet  direction. No. This is y our  f irewall rule num ber.  Th e or dering of your rules is im por tant  as rules are applied in turn.
 Chapter 7 FirewallBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 1257.3.1  Firewall Rules Configuration   I n t he Fire w all Rule s screen, click Add or click a r ule’s Edit but t on t o display this scr een and refer to t he following t able for  inform at ion on the labels.Figure 44   Firewall Rules:  AddAct ive This field displays whet her a firew all rule is t urn ed on or  not.  Select  t he check  box  t o en able t he rule. Clear t he check box to disable t he rule.Nam e This displays t he nam e of the rule.I nter face This displays the LAN or WAN interface( s)  to which this rule is applied.Filter Crit eria This displays the filtering criter ia, such as t he source or  dest inat ion I P addr esses and subnet  m ask t o which this rule applies.Act ion This displays whether the firewall silent ly discards packet s ( D rop), discar ds packet s and sends an I CMP m essage t o the sender ( Re j e ct )  or allows the passage of packet s (P er m it ) .Rem ove Select  ent ries and click t he Re m ove  button t o delet e them .Edit Click the Edit  butt on to go to t he screen where you can edit  the rule.Add Click Add to creat e a new rule.Apply Click Apply to save your  changes back t o the VDSL Rout er.Table 37   Firewall Rules ( continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 7 FirewallBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide126The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.Table 38   Firewall Rules:  AddLABEL DESCRIPTIONAct ive  Select  t his check box t o enable t he rule.Rule Name Enter a descript ive nam e of up to 16 printable English keyboard charact ers, including spaces. To add a firewall rule, you need to configure at least  one of the following fields (except the I n t e r fa ce  field) .I nterface Select  an int erface on t he VDSL Router  t o which this rule applies. Direction Select  a direct ion of t ravel of packet s for which you want t o configure the firewall rule.Protocol Select  t he I P prot ocol (TCP, UDP or I CM P)  and ent er the prot ocol (service t ype) number in the port  field. Source I P Address Ent er t he source I P address in dott ed decim al notation.Source Subnet  MaskEnter the source subnet  mask.Source Port Enter  t he single port  num ber or the range of port  num bers of t he source.Dest inat ion I P AddressEnter  t he dest inat ion I P address in dott ed decim al not at ion.Dest inat ion Subnet  MaskEnter t he destinat ion subnet  m ask.Dest inat ion Port Ent er  t he single port  num ber or t he range of port  num bers of t he dest inat ion.Act ion Use t he drop-down list box t o select whet her t o discard ( Drop), deny and send an I CMP m essage to t he sender of (Re j ect )  or allow t he passage of (Pe rm i t ) packet s t hat  m at ch this rule. Rej ect  Type I f you select  Re j e ct , specify the type of I CMP m essage to send t o t he sender.Back Click Ba ck  to ret urn t o the previous screen.Apply Click Apply to save your cust om ized sett ings and exit this screen.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 127CHAPTER   8Quality of Service (QoS)8.1  Overview Qualit y of Service ( QoS)  refers t o both a network’s ability t o deliver data wit h m inim um  delay, and the net working m et hods used t o control the use of bandwidt h. Without QoS, all t raffic data is equally likely t o be dropped w hen the net work is congest ed. This can cause a reduct ion in net work perform ance and m ake t he net work inadequat e for tim e- crit ical applicat ion such as video-on-dem and.Configure QoS on t he VDSL Router to group and pr ioritize applicat ion traffic and fine- t une net work perform ance. Set t ing up QoS involves these st eps:1Configure classifiers t o sort traffic into different flows. 2Assign priority and define act ions t o be perform ed for a classified t raffic flow. The VDSL Router assigns each packet  a priorit y and then queues the packet accor dingly. Packet s assigned a high priorit y are processed m ore quickly t han t hose wit h low priority if t here is congest ion, allowing tim e- sensitive applications to flow m ore sm oot hly. Tim e- sensitive applicat ions include both t hose t hat  require a low level of lat ency ( delay)  and a low level of jit ter  (variat ions in delay )  such as Voi ce ov er  I P ( VoI P)  o r  I nt er n et  gam ing, and those for which jit t er alone is a problem such as I nt ernet radio or st ream ing video.This chapt er cont ains inform ation about configuring QoS and editing classifiers.8.1.1  What You Can Do in this Chapter• The QoS screen lets you enable or disable QoS and set  t he default DSCP m ark (Section 8.3 on page 129) .• The QoS Qu eu e Set u p screen let s you configure QoS queue assignm ent  (Sect ion 8.4 on page 129) .• The QoS Classifica t ion Setup screen let s you add, edit  or delete QoS classifiers ( Sect ion 8.5 on page 132) .8.2  What You Need to KnowThe following t erm s and concept s m ay help as you read t hrough this chapt er.
Chapter 8 Quality of Service (QoS)Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide128QoS versus CosQoS is used t o priorit ize source-t o-dest inat ion t raffic flows. All packets in t he sam e flow are given the sam e priority. CoS ( class of service) is a way of m anaging traffic in a net work by grouping sim ilar types of t raffic toget her and t reat ing each t ype as a class. You can use CoS to give different  priorities to different packet  types. CoS t echnologies include I EEE 802.1p layer 2 t agging and DiffServ ( Different iated Ser vices or DS) . I EEE 802.1p tagging m akes use of three bit s in t he packet header, while DiffServ is a new protocol and defines a new DS field, which replaces the eight -bit  ToS ( Type of Service)  field in t he I P header. Tagging and MarkingI n a QoS class, you can configure whether to add or change the DSCP (DiffServ Code Point)  value, I EEE 802.1p priorit y level and VLAN I D num ber in a m at ched packet. When the packet passes through a com patible network, the networking device, such as a backbone switch, can provide specific treatm ent  or  service based on t he t ag or marker.Traffic ShapingBurst y t raffic m ay cause net work congestion. Traffic shaping regulat es packet s t o be transm it t ed with a pr e- configured dat a t ransm ission rat e using buffers ( or queues) . Your VDSL Router uses t he Token Bucket algorit hm  t o allow a certain am ount  of large burst s while keeping a lim it at the average rat e. Traffic PolicingTraffic policing is the lim iting of the input or out put t ransm ission rat e of a class of t raffic on t he basis of user-defined criteria. Traffic policing m et hods m easure t raffic flows against  user-defined crit eria and ident ify it  as either conform ing, exceeding or violat ing the crit eria.Tr a f f i cTim eTraffic RateTr a f f i cTim eTraffic Rate( Before Traffic Shaping) (Aft er Traffic Shaping)Tr a f f i cTim eTraffic RateTrafficTim eTraffic Rate( Before Traffic Policing) ( After Traffic Policing)
 Chapter 8 Quality of Service (QoS)Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 1298.3  The QoS Screen Click Advance d Setup >  QoS t o open the screen  show n next . Use t his screen to enable or disable QoS and set  t he default  DSCP m ar k for outgoing packet s t hat  do not m atch any classification rules. Figure 45   QoS The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen. 8.4  The QoS Queue Setup ScreenClick Advance d Setup >  QoS >  QoS Queue   t o open the screen shown next. Use this screen t o configure QoS queue assignm ent. Table 39   QoSLABEL DESCRIPTIONQoS Select  the Ena ble  check box to t urn on QoS to im prove your net wor k perform ance. Select  Default  DSCP Mar k Set  the default DSCP ( DiffServ Code Point ) value for outgoing packet s t hat do not m at ch any classification rules.Apply/ Save Click this to save your changes.
Chapter 8 Quality of Service (QoS)Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide130Figure 46   QoS Queue Set up The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen. Table 40   QoS Queue SetupLABEL DESCRIPTIONNam e This shows t he descr iptive nam e of this queue.Key This is the queue’s index num ber.St at us This field displays whet her t he queue is act ive or not . A yellow bulb signifies t hat  t his queue is act ive. A gray bulb signifies that  this queue is not  act ive.I nterface This show s the name of the VDSL Router’s interface t hrough which traffic in this queue passes.Qid This shows the pr iority of this queue for the interface.Prec/ Alg/ Wght This displays t he queue’s default precedence, queue m anagem ent algorit hm , and weight ed round robin weight .DSL Latency This displays whet her the ATM int erface uses int erleave delay (Pat h1 )  or fast  m od e w it h no int erleave delay ( Pa th0 ) .PTM Priority This displays the queue’s PTM priority (H igh  or Low ) . This has no effect  at  the time of w rit in g.Shaping Rat e This displays the m axim um  transm ission rate for t raffic in this queue.Burst  Size This displays the m axim um  num ber of cells the queue can send at the shaping rat e.Enable Select  an ent ry’s En able opt ion and click the Ena ble  butt on to turn it  on. Rem ove Select  an entry ’s Rem ove opt ion and click the Rem ove but t on to delete it . Add  Click this button t o creat e a new  queue entry.
 Chapter 8 Quality of Service (QoS)Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 1318.4.1  Adding a QoS Queue Click the QoS Queue Se t up  screen’s Add butt on t o configure a new queue. Figure 47   QoS Queue Set up:  Add The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.  Table 41   QoS Queue Setup:  AddLABEL DESCRIPTIONNam e Enter t he descr ipt ive nam e of this queue.Enable Enable or disable t his queue.I nterface Select t he interface t o which this queue is applied.Queue PrecedenceSelect  the precedence lev el (from 1 to 8)  of this queue. The sm aller t he num ber, the higher the priority level. Traffic assigned t o higher prior ity queues get s through faster while t raffic in lower priorit y queues is dr opped if the net work is congest ed.The precedence list  shows the scheduler algorit hm  for  each precedence level. The scheduler algorithm  depends on the int er face. Ethernet  inter faces use st rict  priority ( SP) . ATM and PTM int er faces use t he scheduler algor ithm  configured for t he int er face (w eight ed round robin or weighted fair queuing).The VDSL Rout er  uses the algorit hm  t o service queues wit h the sam e precedence.The VDSL Rout er uses st rict  priorit y t o ser vice queues with different  precedences.
Chapter 8 Quality of Service (QoS)Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide1328.5  The QoS Classification Setup Screen Click Advance d Set u p >  QoS >  QoS Classification to open the following screen. Use t his screen to m anage QoS classifiers. A classifier groups traffic into data flow s according to specific crit eria such as the source address, dest ination address, source port num ber, destination port num ber or incom ing int erface. For exam ple, you can configure a classifier t o select  t raffic from the sam e prot ocol port  ( such as Telnet) to form  a flow.You can give different priorit ies t o t raffic t hat  the VDSL Router forwards out  through the WAN int erface. Give high priorit y t o voice and video t o m ake them run m ore sm oothly. Similarly, give low priority to many large file dow nloads so t hat  t hey do not reduce t he quality of ot her  applicat ions. Figure 48   QoS Classificat ion Setup Queue Weight This displays for ATM and PTM interface queues. Select  t he weight of this queue. I f t wo queues have the same precedence, the VDSL Router divides the bandwidth across t he queues according t o their weights. Queues wit h larger  w eight s get  m ore bandwidth than queues wit h sm aller  w eights.Default  Queue Weig htThis displays for ATM and PTM interface queues. Specify the VC’s weight for weighed fair queuing. The higher  t he weight , t he bigger por tion of t he bandwidth the VC get s.Shaping Rate  This displays for  PTM interface queues. Set  the m axim um  t ransm ission rate for traffic in this queue.Shaping Burst  SizeThis displays for PTM interface queues. Set  the m aximum  num ber of cells the queue can send at  t he shaping rat e.PTM Priorit y This displays for PTM int er face queues. Set  the queue t o low or high pr iority. This has no effect  at the time of writing.DSL Latency This displays for ATM and PTM int er face queues. Select  Pa t h0  ( Fa st )  to use no int erleaving and have fast er transm ission (a “ fast  channel”) . Suit able only for a good line with litt le need for error corr ect ion.At  t he t im e of writing the VDSL Router supports fast  m ode only and interleaved is reserved for fut ure use. Apply/ Save Click this butt on to save your changes.Table 41   QoS Queue Setup:  Add (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
 Chapter 8 Quality of Service (QoS)Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 133The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.  8.5.1  Add QoS Classification Rule Click Add n ew  Cla ssifier in the Cla ss Se t up screen or the Edit icon next t o a classifier to open the following screen. Table 42   QoS Classification SetupLABEL DESCRIPTIONClass Nam e This displays the nam e of the classifier  rule.Order This displays the rule’s place in t he list  of classifier rules. The VDSL Router checks traffic against  classifier s in order  unt il it m at ches one.CLASSI FI CATI ON CRI TERI AThese fields show t he criteria specified in the classifier  rule. For exam ple t he int erface from  which traffic of this class com es and t he source MAC address of traffic t hat  m atches this classifier.Class I ntf  This displays the ingress int erface t o which t he classifier applies.Ether Type This displays the t ype of Et her net frames t o which the classifier applies.SrcMAC/  Mask  This display s the source MAC and net work m ask of traffic t o which the classifier applies.DstMAC/  Mask  This displays the destinat ion MAC and net work m ask of traffic t o which the classifier applies.Sr cI P/  PrefixLengt h  This displays the source I P address and prefix length of t raffic t o which the classifier  applies.Dst I P/  Prefix Length  This displays the destination I P address and prefix length of t raffic to which the classifier  applies.Proto This display s the protocol of t raffic to w hich the classifier applies.SrcPort   This display s the source por t of traffic to which the classifier  applies.DstPor t  This displays the dest inat ion port of traffic t o which the classifier applies.DSCP Check  This displays the DSCP m ar k of t raffic to w hich the classifier applies.802.1P Check  This displays the I EEE 802.1p priorit y level of traffic to which t he classifier applies.CLASSI FI CATI ON RESULTSThese fields show  t he changes the classifier rule applies to m at ching traffic.Queue Key   This displays the num ber of the queue t o which the VDSL Rout er adds traffic that  m atches this classifier.DSCP Mar k  Th is display s t he DSCP m ark  t h e VDSL Rou ter adds t o tr af fic t hat  m at ch es t his classifier.802.1P Mark  This displays the I EEE 802.1p priority level t he VDSL Rout er assigns t o traffic t hat m atches this classifier.Forward I nft   This displays the int er face t hrough w hich the VDSL Rout er forwards t raffic t hat  m at ches this classifier. Un cha nge  m eans t he VDSL Rout er for wards t raffic of this class according to t he default rout ing t able.Rate Lim it( kbps)   This displays the rat e lim it (if any)  t hat  the VDSL Rout er applies to traffic t hat m atches this classifier. Enable Select  an ent ry’s Ena ble opt ion and click the Ena ble but ton t o t ur n it on. Rem ove Select  an entry’s Rem ove option and click the Re m ove butt on to delet e it. Add  Click this but ton t o cr eate a new  classifier rule.
Chapter 8 Quality of Service (QoS)Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide134Figure 49   QoS Classificat ion Setup:  AddThe following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.  Table 43   QoS Classification Setup:  AddLABEL DESCRIPTIONTraffic Class Nam eEnter  a descript ive nam e of up to 15 pr int able English keyboard charact ers, not including spaces.Rule Or der Select  an ex ist ing num ber for where you want  to put t his classifier t o m ove t he classifier  t o the num ber you selected after clicking Apply.Select  La st  t o put  this rule in the back of the classifier list .Rule St at us Enable or disable t his classifier.Specify Classification Criteria Configure these fields t o ident ify the traffic to which the class applies. The fields available var y  depending on t he selected int erface and Ether type. Leave a field blank t o not  apply that criter ion. Class I nterface  Select t he ingress int erface t o which the classifier applies.Ether Type Select t he predefined applicat ion ( I P, ARP, I Pv6, PPPoE discovery, PPPoE session, 8865, 8866, or I EEE 802.1q) to w hich t he classifier applies. The list  of ty pes available to choose from  varies depending on the select ed interface. Source MAC AddressEnter  a MAC address to apply the classifier t o packets from  that  MAC address.
 Chapter 8 Quality of Service (QoS)Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 135Source MAC MaskType t he m ask for  t he specified MAC address t o determ ine which bits a packet ’s MAC addr ess should m at ch. Enter  “ f”  for each bit of the specified source MAC address that  the traffic’s MAC address should m at ch. Ent er “ 0” for the bit (s)  of t he m at ched traffic’s MAC address, which can be of any hexadecim al character(s) . For exam ple, if you set the MAC address to 00: 13: 49: 00: 00: 00 and t he m ask t o ff: ff: ff: 00: 00: 00, a packet with a MAC address of 00: 13: 49: 12: 34: 56 m at ches this cr it eria.Dest inat ion MAC AddressEnter  a MAC address to apply the classifier to packets destined for that  MAC address.Dest inat ion MAC MaskType t he m ask for  t he specified MAC address t o determ ine which bits a packet ’s MAC addr ess should m at ch. Enter  “ f”  for each bit of the specified source MAC address that  the traffic’s MAC address should m at ch. Ent er “ 0” for the bit (s)  of t he m at ched traffic’s MAC address, which can be of any hexadecim al character(s) . For exam ple, if you set the MAC address to 00: 13: 49: 00: 00: 00 and t he m ask t o ff: ff: ff: 00: 00: 00, a packet with a MAC address of 00: 13: 49: 12: 34: 56 m at ches this cr it eria.Source I P Address[ / Mask]Select  this and ent er an I P address t o apply t he classifier t o packets from  t hat  I P address. You can also include a source subnet  m ask.Ven do r Cl ass I D  ( DHCP Option 60)Select  this and ent er  t he Vendor Class I dent ifier ( Option 60)  of the m atched traffic, such as the t ype of the hardware or  firm ware.User Class I D DHCP option 77Select  this and ent er a str ing that  identifies the user ’s cat egor y or applicat ion ty pe in the m at ched DHCP packet s.Dest inat ion I P Address[ / Mask]Enter  an I P address to apply the classifier t o packet s destined for t hat  I P address. You can also include a dest inat ion subnet  m ask.Different iat ed Ser vice Code Point  ( DSCP) CheckSelect  a DSCP m ar k  of t raffic to w hich to apply the classifier.802.1p Priorit y CheckThis field is available only when you set the Et her  Type field to 8 0 2 1 Q.Select t he I EEE 802.1p priority level ( bet ween 0 and 7) of traffic t o which to apply the classifier. "0" is the lowest  priority level and " 7" is the highest .Specify Classification Result sConfigure these fields t o change t raffic that  m atches the classifier. The fields available vary depending on the select ed interface, Ether type, and som et im es on the select ed class queue. Leave a field blank to not  apply that  type of change. Specify Class Queue Select  the queue to which to add traffic that  m atches this classifier.Forward To I nter face Select  a WAN interface through w hich to forward traffic of this class. Select Uncha nge to forward traffic of this class according to t he default  routing table.Mark Different iat ed Ser vice Code Point  ( DSCP):Select  the DSCP m ar k t o add t o traffic t hat  m atches this classifier. Use Au to m arking to autom atically apply a DSCP m ark according t o t he t ype of traffic. Use defa ult  to leave the DSCP m ar k unchanged.Protocol Select a service t ype ( TCP, UDP, I CMP or I GM P)  of traffic to w hich to apply the classifier.Mark  802.1p priorit y Select  the I EEE 802.1p priorit y level t o assign to t raffic t hat m at ches this classifier.Set  Rat e Lim it  Set  the rat e lim it  to apply t o traffic that  m at ches this classifier. Apply/ Save Click this but ton t o save your changes.Table 43   QoS Classification Setup:  Add (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 8 Quality of Service (QoS)Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide1368.6  Technical ReferenceThe following sect ion contains addit ional t echnical inform at ion about  the VDSL Router features described in t his chapt er.IEEE 802.1Q TagThe I EEE 802.1Q st andard defines an explicit VLAN tag in t he MAC header  to ident ify the VLAN m em bership of a fram e across bridges. A VLAN t ag includes t he 12- bit  VLAN I D and 3- bit  user priority. The VLAN I D associat es a fram e with a specific VLAN and provides t he inform ation t hat  devices need t o process t he fram e across t he net work. I EEE 802.1p specifies t he user priority field and defines up to eight  separate traffic t ypes. The following t able describes t he t raffic types defined in t he I EEE 802.1d standard ( which incorporat es the 802.1p) .  DiffServ QoS is used to prioritize source-t o-destination t raffic flows. All packets in t he flow are given t he sam e priority. You can use CoS ( class of service) t o give different priorit ies t o different packet  types.DiffServ ( Differentiated Services)  is a class of service (CoS)  m odel that m arks packets so that  t hey receive specific per- hop t reat m ent at  DiffServ-com pliant  net work devices along t he route based on the application types and traffic flow. Packets are m arked with DiffServ Code Points ( DSCPs)  indicat ing t he level of service desired. This allows the interm ediary DiffServ-com pliant  network devices t o handle the packets different ly depending on the code point s wit hout  t he need t o negot iate pat hs or rem em ber st at e inform at ion for ever y flow. I n addit ion, applicat ions do not have to request a part icular service or give advanced not ice of where t he t raffic is going. DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new Different iated Services ( DS)  field t o r eplace t he Ty pe of Service ( TOS)  field in t he I P header. The DS field contains a 2- bit unused field and a 6- bit  DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels. The following figure illust rat es the DS field. Table 44   I EEE 802.1p Priorit y Level and Traffic TypePRIORITY LEVEL TRAFFIC TYPELevel 7 Typically used for netw or k cont rol t raffic such as rout er  configuration m essages.Level 6 Typically used for voice t raffic that  is especially sensitive t o j it ter  ( j it ter is t he variations in delay ).Level 5 Typically used for video t hat  consum es high bandw idth and is sensitive to j it t er.Level 4 Typically used for controlled load, lat ency-sensitive traffic such as SNA (System s Network Architect ure)  transact ions.Level 3 Typically used for  “ excellent  effor t”  or better t han best  effor t and would include im port ant business traffic that  can tolerat e som e delay.Level 2 This is for “ spare bandw idt h”. Level 1 This is t ypically used for  non- critical “ background”  traffic such as bulk transfers that  are allow ed but  t hat  should not affect  other applicat ions and users. Level 0 Typically used for  best- effort  t raffic.
 Chapter 8 Quality of Service (QoS)Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 137DSCP is backward compat ible wit h the t hree precedence bit s in the ToS oct et  so that non- DiffServ com pliant , ToS-enabled net work device will not  conflict  with t he DSCP m apping.The DSCP value determ ines t he forwarding behavior, t he PHB ( Per-Hop Behavior) , t hat  each packet gets across t he DiffServ net work. Based on t he m arking rule, differ ent  kinds of t raffic can be m arked for different  kinds of forwar ding. Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and t he configured policies.IP PrecedenceSim ilar to I EEE 802.1p priorit izat ion at layer-2, you can use I P precedence t o priorit ize packets in a layer- 3 net work. I P precedence uses three bits of the eight- bit  ToS ( Type of Service)  field in the I P header. There are eight classes of services ( ranging from  zero t o seven) in I P precedence. Zero is the lowest  priority level and seven is t he highest. Automatic Priority Queue AssignmentI f you enable QoS on the VDSL Router, the VDSL Rout er can autom at ically base on t he I EEE 802.1p priority level, I P precedence and/ or  packet  lengt h t o assign priorit y t o t raffic which does not  m atch a class. The following t able shows you the internal layer-2 and layer- 3 QoS m apping on the VDSL Router. On the VDSL Rout er, traffic assigned t o higher priorit y queues get s t hrough fast er while t raffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is congest ed.DSCP (6 bits) Unused (2 bits)Table 45   I nternal Layer2 and Layer 3 QoS MappingPRIORITY QUEUELAYER 2 LAYER 3IEEE 802.1P USER PRIORITY (ETHERNET PRIORITY)TOS (IP PRECEDENCE) DSCP IP PACKET LENGTH (BYTE)0 1 0 000000122 0 0 000000 > 11003 3 1 001110001100001010001000250~ 11004 4 2 010110010100010010010000
Chapter 8 Quality of Service (QoS)Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide1385 5 3 011110011100011010011000< 2506 6 4 1001101001001000101000005 1011101010007 7 6 1100001110007Table 45   I nternal Layer2 and Layer 3 QoS MappingPRIORITY QUEUELAYER 2 LAYER 3IEEE 802.1P USER PRIORITY (ETHERNET PRIORITY)TOS (IP PRECEDENCE) DSCP IP PACKET LENGTH (BYTE)
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 139CHAPTER   9Routing9.1  Overview The VDSL Rout er usually uses t he default gat ew ay t o rout e out bound t raffic from  com put ers on the LAN t o t he I nternet . To have t he VDSL Router send dat a t o devices not  reachable t hrough t he default gat eway, use st at ic routes.For  exam ple, t he next figure shows a computer  (A)  connected to the VDSL Rout er’s LAN int erface. The VDSL Router routes m ost  traffic from  A to the I nt ernet  t hrough the VDSL Router’s default gat eway (R1 ) . You creat e one st atic route to connect  t o services offered by your I SP behind rout er R2 . You creat e anot her st at ic route t o com m unicate with a separate net work behind a rout er R3  connect ed to t he LAN.   Figure 50   Exam ple of Routing Topology9.1.1  What You Can Do in this Chapter• Use the D efault Ga tew ay screen to select  WAN int erfaces t o serve as syst em  default  gateways (Sect ion 9.2 on page 140) . • Use the Stat ic Rou t e screen t o view and set  up st at ic routes on t he VDSL Router (Sect ion 9.3 on page 140) .• Use the Policy  For w a rding screen to configure policy rout ing on the Device ( Sect ion 9.4 on page 142) . • Use the RI P screen t o configure RI P sett ings ( Section 9.5 on page 143) .WANR1R2AR3LAN
Chapter 9 RoutingBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide1409.2  The Default Gateway ScreenClick Advanced Se t up >  Rout ing >  Defau lt Gatew ay t o open the De fa ult  Gatew ay screen. Use t his scr een t o select  WAN interfaces t o serve as syst em  default  gat ew ays. Figure 51   Default  Gat eway  Move t he WAN interfaces to serve as syst em  default gateways from  Ava ilable  Rou t ed W AN  I n t er fa ce s t o Select e d De fa ult  Ga t ew a y I nt erface s. Use t he Select ed W AN  I nter face  field to select  the preferred WAN interface t o server as the VDSL Rou t er ’s defau lt  I Pv 6 gat eway.   Click Apply / Sa ve  to save your changes.9.3  The Static Route ScreenUse t his screen to view and configure t he st atic route rules on t he VDSL Rout er. Click Advance d Se t up >  Rou t ing >  St a t ic Route to open t he following screen.Figure 52   Stat ic Rout e
 Chapter 9 RoutingBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 141The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen. 9.3.1  Add Static Route Use t his screen t o add a stat ic route. Click Add in the Sta t ic Rout e screen t o display the following screen.Figure 53   Stat ic Rout e:  AddThe following t able describes t he labels in t his screen. Table 46   St at ic RouteLABEL DESCRIPTIONI P Version This displays whet her t he entry uses I Pv4 or I Pv6.DstI P/  PrefixLengthThis specifies the I P network address and prefix lengt h of the final dest inat ion. Rout ing is alway s based on net work num ber. Gateway This is the I P address of the gatew ay. The gateway is a rout er or switch on t he sam e net work  segm ent as the device's LAN or WAN port. The gat eway helps forward packet s to their destinations.I nterface This is the int erface t his st at ic rout e uses to forward t raffic for  t he listed dest ination addr ess.Met ric The m et ric represent s the " cost  of transm ission" . A rout er determ ines the best  rout e for transm ission by choosing a pat h w it h t he lowest  "cost ". The sm aller t he num ber, t he lower  the "cost ".Rem ove Select ent ries and click the Re m ove but ton t o delet e them . Add  Click t his to configure a new  st atic route.Table 47   St at ic Route:  Add (Sheet  1 of 2)LABEL DESCRIPTIONI P Version Select  whether your I P type is I Pv4  or I Pv6 . Dest inat ion I P address/ prefix lengthEnt er the I Pv4 or  I Pv6 address and net work lengt h of the final dest inat ion. I nterface Select  the inter face through w hich this st at ic rout e sends t raffic.
Chapter 9 RoutingBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide1429.4  The Policy Routing ScreenTraditionally, rout ing is based on t he dest inat ion address only and the VDSL Router takes the short est path t o forward a packet. Policy rout ing allows the VDSL Router to override t he default  routing behavior and alter the packet  routing based on t he policy defined by the net work adm inist rat or. Policy- based routing is applied t o out going packet s, prior to the norm al routing.You can use source-based policy rout ing t o direct  t raffic from  different users t hrough different  connect ions or distribut e t raffic am ong m ultiple paths for load sharing.Use t he Policy Routin g screen to view and configure routing policies on the VDSL Router . Click Advance d Setup >  Rou t ing >  Policy  Routin g to open t he following screen.Figure 54   Policy Rout ingThe following t able describes t he labels in t his screen. 9.4.1  Add Policy Routing Click Add in t he Policy Routin g screen to open the following screen. Use t his screen to configure the required inform at ion for a policy rout e.Gateway I P Address Enter t he I P address of t he gat eway when you configure a st at ic rout e that uses an I P- based int erface ( such as I PoE, I PoA, or LAN) . The gat eway is a rout er or  switch on the same net work segm ent as the dev ice's LAN or WAN por t. The gateway helps forwar d packet s to their  dest inat ions.Apply/ Save Click this but ton t o save your changes.Table 47   St at ic Route:  Add (Sheet  2 of 2)LABEL DESCRIPTIONTable 48   Policy RoutingLABEL DESCRIPTIONPolicy Nam e This displays the nam e of t he rule.Source I P This displays t he source I P address.LAN Port This displays the sour ce LAN port num ber.WAN This displays t he WAN int erface through w hich the traffic is rout ed. Default GW This displays the default  gat eway I P addr ess the route uses.Rem ove Select  ent ries and click t he Re m ove  butt on t o delete t hem . Add Click t his t o creat e a new  policy rout ing r ule.
 Chapter 9 RoutingBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 143Figure 55   Policy Rout ing:  Add The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen. 9.5  The RIP ScreenClick Adva nce d Se tup >  Rout ing >  RI P to open t he RI P screen. Use t his screen to configure RI P sett ings. Rout ing I nform ation Pr ot ocol (RI P, RFC 1058 and RFC 1389) allow s a device t o exchange routing inform ation wit h other routers.Figure 56   RI P Table 49   Policy Rout ing:  AddLABEL DESCRIPTIONPolicy Nam e Enter a descr iptive nam e of print able English keyboard characters, not  including spaces.Physical LAN PortSelect  t he source LAN Et her net port num ber. Source I P  Ent er t he source I P address.Use I nt er face Select  a WAN int er face through which the t raffic is sent . You m ust  have t he WAN int erface( s)  already configured in t he Br oa dband screens. Default  Gateway I P Ent er the default gat eway I P address the rout e uses.Apply/ Save Click this but ton t o save your changes.
Chapter 9 RoutingBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide144The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen. Table 50   RI PLABEL DESCRIPTIONI nterface This is the nam e of the int erface in which the RI P set ting is used. Ve r si on The RIP ver sion contr ols the form at  and the broadcasting m ethod of the RI P packets that  the VDSL Router sends (it recognizes bot h for m at s when receiving) . RI P version 1  is universally  supported but RIP ver sion 2 carries m ore inform ation. RI P version 1  is probably adequat e for  m ost  networks, unless you hav e an unusual net wor k t opology. Operat ion Select  Passive t o h av e t he VDSL Rout er updat e t he rout ing table based on t he RIP packet s received from  neighbors but not  advert ise its rout e inform at ion t o ot her r out er s in this int erface.Select  Act ive  t o have t he VDSL Router adver t ise it s rout e infor m ation and also list en for rout ing updates fr om  neighboring rout ers.Enabled Select  the check box t o act ivate t he set tings.Apply/ Save Click this but ton t o save your changes.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 145CHAPTER   10DNS Setup10.1  Overview DNSDNS ( Dom ain Nam e Syst em ) is for m apping a dom ain nam e t o its corresponding I P address and vice ver sa. The DNS server is extrem ely im port ant  because w it hout it, you m ust  know t he I P address of a m achine before you can access it . I n addit ion to the syst em  DNS server( s) , each WAN int erface (service)  is set  to have its own st at ic or dynam ic DNS server list. You can configure a DNS st atic rout e t o forward DNS queries for certain dom ain nam es t hrough a specific WAN interface to it s DNS server( s) . The VDSL Router uses a syst em  DNS ser ver (in the order you specify in the Br oadband scr een)  t o resolve dom ain nam es that  do not  m at ch any DNS rout ing entry. Aft er the VDSL Router receives a DNS reply from a DNS server, it  creat es a new ent ry for t he resolved I P address in t he routing table.Dynamic DNSDynam ic DNS allows you to update your current dynam ic I P address with one or m any dynam ic DNS services so that anyone can cont act  you ( in Net Meet ing, CU-SeeMe, etc.) . You can also access your FTP server or Web site on your own com puter using a domain nam e ( for inst ance m yhost .dhs.org, where m yhost  is a nam e of your choice)  t hat  will never change instead of using an I P address t hat  changes each tim e you reconnect . Your friends or relatives will always be able to call you even if t hey don't know your I P address.First  of all, you need t o have regist ered a dynam ic DNS account  with www.dyndns.org. This is for people wit h a dynam ic I P from  t heir I SP or DHCP server that would st ill like to have a dom ain nam e. The Dynam ic DNS service provider will give you a password or key. 10.1.1  What You Can Do in this Chapter• Use the D NS Ser ve r screen t o configure DNS ser ver sett ings ( Sect ion 10.2 on page 146) .• Use the D ynam ic DNS screen t o configure DDNS sett ings on the VDSL Router (Sect ion 10.3 on page 147) .
Chapter 10 DNS SetupBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide14610.1.2  What You Need To KnowDYNDNS WildcardEnabling t he wildcard feature for  your host  causes * .yourhost .dyndns.org to be aliased to t he sam e I P address as yourhost.dyndns.org. This feature is useful if you want to be able t o use, for exam ple, www.yourhost .dyndns.org and st ill reach your host nam e.I f you have a privat e WAN I P address, then you cannot use Dynam ic DNS.10.2  The DNS Server ScreenUse t his screen to view and configur e DNS routes on t he VDSL Router. Click W ire less ne t w or k >  Classic con figura t ion >  Adva nced Se t up >  DN S >  DN S Ser ver  t o open t his screen.Figure 57   DNS Server
 Chapter 10 DNS SetupBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 147The following t able describes t he fields in this screen. 10.3  The Dynamic DNS ScreenUse t his screen t o creat e m anage DDNS ent ries. Click Advance d Se t up >  DNS >  D yn am ic DNS to display the following screen.Table 51   DNS ServerLABEL DESCRIPTIONSelect  DNS Server I nter face fr om  available WAN int erfacesSelect t his to have t he VDSL Rout er get  the DNS server  addresses from  one of the VDSL Rout er’s WAN interfaces. Select ed DNS Server I nter facesSelect  a WAN int erface t hrough which to get  DNS server addresses.You can select  multiple WAN int erfaces for t he device t o t ry. The VDSL Rout er t ries t he WAN int erfaces in the order listed and uses only t he DNS server  inform at ion of the first  WAN int erface t hat  connect s;  there is no backup WAN funct ion. To change the pr iorit y order rem ove t hem  all and add t hem  back in again. Av ailable WAN I nter facesThese are t he WAN int er faces you can select  from .Use t he following Stat ic DNS I P addressSelect  this to have t he VDSL Rout er use the DNS server addresses you configure m anually.Prim ar y DNS ser verEnter  t he first  DNS server address assigned by the I SP.Secondary DNS ser verEnter  t he second DNS server address assigned by the I SP.Obtain I Pv6 DNS info from  a WAN int erfaceSelect  this to have the VDSL Rout er get  t he I Pv6 DNS server addresses from  t he I SP aut om atically.WAN I nterface selectedSelect a WAN int erface through w hich you want to obtain the I Pv6 DNS related inform at ion.Use t he following Stat ic I Pv6 DNS addressSelect  this to have t he VDSL Router use the I Pv 6 DNS server addresses you configure m anually.Prim ar y I Pv6 DNS ser verEnter  t he first  I Pv 6 DNS server address assigned by the I SP.Secondary I Pv6 DNS ser verEnter t he second IPv 6 DNS server address assigned by the I SP.Apply/ Save Click this but t on to save your changes.
Chapter 10 DNS SetupBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide148Figure 58   Dynam ic DNSThe following t able describes t he fields in this screen. 10.3.1  The Dynamic DNS Add ScreenUse t his screen t o create a DDNS ent ry. Click t he D ynam ic DNS screen’s Add butt on t o display t he following screen.Figure 59   Dynam ic DNS AddThe following t able describes t he fields in this screen. Table 52   Dynamic DNSLABEL DESCRIPTIONHostnam e This displays the ent ry’s dom ain nam e.Usernam e This displays the entry’s user nam e.Service This displays the ent ry’s Dynam ic DNS service pr ovider.I nterface This displays t he int erface the DDNS ent ry uses.Rem ove Select entries and click the Re m ove  butt on to delet e t hem . Add Click this to creat e a new DDNS entr y.Table 53   Dynamic DNS AddLABEL DESCRIPTIOND- DNS pr ov id er   Select your Dynam ic DNS serv ice provider from  the dr op-down list  box.Hostnam e Type t he dom ain nam e assigned to your VDSL Rout er  by your Dynam ic DNS provider.You can specify up to two host nam es in the field separat ed by a com ma ( ",") .
 Chapter 10 DNS SetupBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 149I nterface Select t he int erface the DDNS ent ry uses.Usernam e Type your user nam e.Password Type the password assigned to you.Apply/ Save Click this but t on to save your changes.Table 53   Dynam ic DNS Add (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 10 DNS SetupBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide150
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 151CHAPTER   11UPnP11.1  OverviewUniversal Plug and Play (UPnP)  is a dist ributed, open net working standard t hat  uses TCP/ I P for sim ple peer-to-peer net work connectivity between devices. A UPnP device can dynam ically join a net work, obt ain an I P address, convey it s capabilities and learn about  other devices on t he net work. I n t urn, a device can leave a net work sm oot hly and aut om at ically when it  is no longer in use.11.1.1  What You Can Do in this ChapterUse t he UPnP screen to enable UPnP on the VDSL Router (Sect ion 11.2 on page 152) .11.1.2  What You Need To KnowIdentifying UPnP DevicesUPnP hardware is ident ified as an icon in the Net work Connections folder (Windows XP) . Each UPnP com pat ible device installed on your net work will appear as a separate icon. Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you t o access the inform at ion and properties of t hat  device. NAT TraversalUPnP NAT traversal aut omat es the process of allowing an applicat ion to operate through NAT. UPnP net work devices can autom atically configure net work addressing, announce t heir presence in the net work t o other UPnP devices and enable exchange of sim ple product  and service descript ions. NAT traversal allows t he following:• Dynam ic port m apping• Lear ning public I P addresses• Assigning lease t im es to m appingsWindows Messenger is an exam ple of an application t hat  supports NAT traversal and UPnP. See t he Chapter 6 on page 115 for m or e inform ation on NAT.Cautions with UPnPThe aut om at ed nat ure of NAT traversal applications in est ablishing t heir own services and opening firewall port s m ay present  net work security issues. Net work inform at ion and configuration m ay also be obt ained and m odified by users in some net work environm ents.
Chapter 11 UPnPBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide152When a UPnP device j oins a net work, it announces it s presence with a m ulticast  m essage. For security reasons, t he VDSL Router allows m ulticast  m essages on t he LAN only.All UPnP- enabled devices m ay com m unicat e freely with each ot her wit hout  additional configuration. Disable UPnP if t his is not your int ent ion. UPnP and ZyXELZyXEL has achieved UPnP certification from  the Universal Plug and Play Forum  UPnP™ I m plem ent ers Corp. ( UI C) . ZyXEL's UPnP im plem ent at ion support s I nt ernet Gateway Device ( I GD)  1.0. See Sect ion 11.3 on page 152 for exam ples of installing and using UPnP.11.2  The UPnP ScreenUse t he following screen t o enable or disable UPnP on your VDSL Router. Click Advanced Setup >  UPnP t o display the screen show n next .Figure 60   Net work Set ting >  Hom e Net working >  UPnPThe following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.11.3  Installing UPnP in Windows XP ExampleThis sect ion shows how to install UPnP in Window s Windows XP. 1Click St a r t  and Cont r ol Pa ne l. Table 54   Net work Set t ing >  Home Net working >  UPnPLABEL DESCRIPTIONEnable UPnP Select  t his to allow UPnP- enabled applications to aut om at ically configure the VDSL Rout er so t hat  t hey can com m unicate t hrough t he VDSL Rout er by using NAT traver sal. UPnP applications aut om at ically  reserve a NAT forwarding port in order t o comm unicat e wit h anot her UPnP enabled dev ice;  t his elim inates the need to m anually  configure port  forwarding for  t he UPnP enabled applicat ion. Be awar e t hat anyone could use a UPnP applicat ion t o open the web configurat or's login screen without  ent ering the VDSL Router's I P address ( although you m ust  still ent er the passwor d to access t he web configurator).Apply/ Save Click t his to save your changes.
 Chapter 11 UPnPBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 1532Double- click Ne t w ork  Conne ct ions.3I n t he N e tw or k Con ne ct ions window, click Adva nced in t he m ain m enu and select  Opt ional N etw ork ing Com ponents …. Network Co nnections4The W indow s Opt iona l N e t w or kin g Com ponent s W izard window displays. Select Net w ork ing Se rvice in the Com ponent s select ion box and click D e t a ils. Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard5I n t he N e tw orking Se rvice s window, select  the Unive rsa l Plug a nd Play check box.
Chapter 11 UPnPBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide154Networking Services6Click OK to go back t o the W indow s Opt ional N etw ork ing Com pon en t  W iz ard window and click N e x t . 11.4  Using UPnP in Windows XP ExampleThis sect ion shows you how t o use the UPnP feature in Windows XP. You m ust  already have UPnP inst alled in Windows XP and UPnP act ivated on the VDSL Router.Make sure t he computer  is connected to a LAN port of the VDSL Router. Turn on your com puter and the VDSL Router. Auto-discover Your UPnP-enabled Network Device1Click St a r t  and Cont r ol Pa ne l. Double- click N e t w or k Connect ions. An icon displays under I nt ernet  Gat eway.2Right-click t he icon and select  Pr ope r t ie s.
 Chapter 11 UPnPBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 155Network Co nnections3I n t he I nt e rnet Con ne ct ion Pr opert ies window, click Set t ings t o see t he port m appings t here were aut om at ically created. Internet Connec tion Propertie s 4You m ay edit  or delete t he por t m appings or click Add to manually add port mappings.
Chapter 11 UPnPBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide156Internet Connection Properties: Advanced SettingsInternet Connec tion Propertie s: Advanced Set tings: Add5When t he UPnP-enabled device is disconnected from  your com puter, all port  m appings will be deleted autom at ically.6Select  Show  icon in not ifica t ion ar ea w hen conne ct ed opt ion and click OK. An icon displays in the syst em  t ray. System Tray Icon7Double- click on the icon to display your curr ent  I nt ernet connect ion st at us.
 Chapter 11 UPnPBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 157Internet Conn ection StatusWeb Configurator Easy AccessWith UPnP, you can access the web-based configurat or on t he VDSL Rout er wit hout finding out t he I P address of the VDSL Rout er  first . This com es helpful if you do not  know the I P address of t he VDSL Rout er .Follow t he st eps below to access t he web configurator.1Click St a r t  and t hen Cont r ol Pa ne l. 2Double- click Ne t w ork  Conne ct ions. 3Select  My Net w ork  Pla ces under Other Pla ce s.
Chapter 11 UPnPBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide158Network Co nnections4An icon wit h the description for each UPnP- enabled device displays under Local N etw ork. 5Right-click on the icon for your VDSL Router and select  I nvoke . The web configurator login screen displays. Network Co nnections: My Netw ork Places6Right-click on the icon for your VDSL Rout er and select  Prope r t ie s. A properties window displays with basic inform ation about t he VDSL Router.
 Chapter 11 UPnPBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 159Network Co nnections: My Netw ork Places: Proper ties: Example
Chapter 11 UPnPBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide160
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 161CHAPTER   12USB Services12.1  Overview The VDSL Rout er has a USB port  used t o share files via a USB m emory st ick or a USB hard drive. I n the USB Se rvice screens, you can enable file- sharing server, m edia server, and print er server.12.1.1  What You Can Do in this Chapter• Use the File Sh aring screen t o configure a file- sharing server ( Sect ion 12.2 on page 162) .• Use the Printer  Server  screen t o enable t he print  server (Sect ion 12.3 on page 165) .• Use the M edia Server  screen to enable or disable the sharing of m edia files (Sect ion 12.4 on page 166) .12.1.2  What You Need To KnowThe following t erm s and concept s m ay help as you r ead t his chapter.12.1.2.1  About File SharingWorkgroup nameThis is the nam e given t o a set  of com puters t hat  are connect ed on a network and share resources such as a printer or files. Windows aut om atically assigns t he workgroup nam e when you set up a net work. SharesWhen set t ings are set t o default, each USB device connect ed to t he VDSL Router  is given a folder, called a “ share”. I f a USB hard drive connect ed to t he VDSL Router  has m ore t han one part ition, then each part ition will be allocated a share. You can also configure a “ share”  to be a sub- folder or file on t he USB device.File SystemsA file syst em  is a way of st oring and organizing files on your hard drive and storage device. Often different  operat ing syst em s such as Windows or  Linux have different  file syst em s. The file sharing feat ure on your VDSL Router support s File Allocation Table ( FAT)  and FAT32. Common Internet File SystemThe VDSL Router uses Com m on I nt ernet File Syst em  ( CI FS)  protocol for its file sharing funct ions. CIFS com patible comput ers can access the USB file st orage devices connected to t he VDSL Router.
Chapter 12 USB ServicesBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide162CIFS protocol is support ed on Microsoft Windows, Linux Sam ba and ot her operat ing syst em s (refer  to your syst em s specifications for CI FS com pat ibility). 12.1.2.2  About Printer ServerPrint ServerThis is a com put er or other device which m anages one or m ore print ers, and which sends print j obs to each printer from  the com put er it self or ot her devices.Operating SystemAn operating syst em  ( OS)  is t he int er face which helps you m anage a com puter. Com m on exam ples are Microsoft  Windows, Mac OS or Linux.TCP/IPTCP/ I P ( Transm ission Control Prot ocol/  I nt ernet  Prot ocol)  is a set  of comm unications prot ocols t hat  m ost  of the I nt ernet  runs on.   PortA port maps a network service such as ht tp t o a pr ocess running on your computer, such as a process run by your web browser. When t raffic from  t he I nt ernet  is received on your com puter, t he port  num ber is used to ident ify which process running on your com put er it  is int ended for. Supported OSsYour operating syst em  m ust  support TCP/ IP port s for printing and be com pat ible with the RAW ( port 9100)  prot ocol.The following OSs support VDSL Rout er’s printer  sharing feat ure.• Microsoft Windows 95, Windows 98 SE ( Second Edit ion), Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Window s XP or Macint osh OS X. 12.2  The File Sharing ScreenYou can share files on a USB m emory stick or hard drive connect ed to your VDSL Router with users on your net work. The following figure is an overview  of the VDSL Router’s file server  feature. Com put ers A and B can access files on a USB device ( C)  which is connect ed to t he VDSL Router.
 Chapter 12 USB ServicesBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 163Figure 61   File Sharing OverviewThe VDSL Router will not be able t o join t he workgroup if your local area net work has rest rict ions set up that  do not allow devices to j oin a workgroup. I n t his case, cont act your netw ork adm inist rator.12.2.1  Before You BeginMake sure the VDSL Rout er  is connect ed t o your net work and turned on.1Connect  the USB device t o one of t he VDSL Router’s USB port . Make sure the VDSL Rout er is connect ed to your network.2The VDSL Router detect s t he USB device and m akes it s contents available for browsing. I f you are connect ing a USB hard drive t hat  com es wit h an ext ernal power supply, m ake sure it is connect ed to an appropriate power source t hat  is on.Note:  I f your USB device cannot be det ect ed by t he VDSL Router, see the t roubleshoot ing for suggest ions. Use t his screen t o set  up file sharing using t he VDSL Router. To access t his screen, Click Adva nced Se t up >  USB Se rvices >  File  Sha r ing.ABC
Chapter 12 USB ServicesBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide164Figure 62   Net work Set t ing >  USB Service >  File SharingEach field is described in the following table.12.2.2  Add New File Sharing UserClick the File Shar ing screen’s Add ne w  user  butt on t o set up a new file sharing user on the VDSL Rou t er .  Table 55   Net work Set t ing >  Home Net working >  File SharingLABEL DESCRIPTIONEnable File Sharing Services ( SAMBA)Select  this t o act ivate file shar ing t hrough t he VDSL Router. Workgroup Nam eYou can add the VDSL Router t o an ex ist ing or  a new workgroup on your netw ork. Enter t he nam e of the work group which your VDSL Rout er aut om at ically j oins.You can set  the VDSL Rout er’s workgroup nam e to be exactly t he sam e as the workgroup nam e to w hich your com put er belongs.Note: The VDSL Router will not be able to join the workgroup if your local area network has restrictions set up that do not allow devices to join a workgroup. In this case, contact your network administrator.Add new user Click t his t o set  up a file-sharing account . Before you can shar e files you need a user account .Rem ove Click this to delet e the user account ( s)  who’s D ele t e  check box is select ed.Enabled This field displays whether a user account  is act ivated or not . Select the check  box to enable the account. Clear t he check box  t o disable the account.User Nam e This display s the user  nam e t hat  has been configured on the VDSL Rout er for file sharing.Delet e Select  t he check box of the user  account  that  you want   t o rem ove from  the list .Apply/ Save Click this to save your changes t o the VDSL Rout er.Cancel Click this to set every field in t his scr een to its last- saved value.
 Chapter 12 USB ServicesBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 165Figure 63   File Sharing:  Add new  user Each field is described in the following table.12.3  The Printer Server ScreenThe VDSL Router allows you t o share a USB print er on your LAN. You can do t his by connect ing a USB printer to one of the USB ports on t he VDSL Router  and then configuring a TCP/ I P port on t he com puters connect ed t o your net work. Figure 64   Sharing a USB Printer12.3.1  Before You BeginTo configure the print  server you need the follow ing:• Your VDSL Router m ust  be connect ed to your com put er and any ot her devices on your net work. The USB print er m ust  be connect ed t o your VDSL Router.• A USB print er with t he driver already inst alled on your com put er.Table 56   File Sharing:  Add new user LABEL DESCRIPTIONUsernam e Enter  a user nam e that  will be allowed to access shares. You can enter  up t o 16 charact er s. Only let t ers and num bers allowed.Password Enter  t he password used t o access the share. You can enter up to 16 charact er s. Only lett er s and num bers are allowed. The passw ord is case sensitive.Password ( Con firm )Retype the password t hat  you ent ered above.Apply Click this to save your changes t o the VDSL Rout er.
Chapter 12 USB ServicesBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide166• The com put ers on your net work m ust  have t he printer soft ware already installed before t hey can creat e a TCP/ I P port for printing via t he net work. Follow your printer m anufact urers instruct ions on how to install the print er software on your com puter. Note:  Your print er ’s inst allat ion instructions m ay ask that you connect  t he printer to your com put er. Connect  your print er t o the VDSL Router inst ead.Use t his screen t o enable or disable sharing of a USB print er  via your VDSL Rout er. To access this screen, click Advan ced Set up >  USB Se rvices >  Print  Serve r.Figure 65   Print  ServerThe following t able describes t he labels in t his m enu.12.4  The Media Server ScreenThe m edia server st ream s video, m usic, and phot o files from  USB st orage to DLNA- com pliant  m edia clients on your network. Connect  the USB st orage device t o t he VDSL Router’s USB port. See Sect ion 2.11 on page 43 for exam ples of using t he m edia server wit h following m edia client s. Note:  Anyone on your network can play t he m edia files in t he published shares. The m edia server does not  use user nam e and password or ot her form s of security.  Click Advan ce d Setup >  USB Se rvices >  Media  Se rver  t o open t his screen and change your VDSL Router’s m edia server set t ings.Table 57   Net work Set ting >  USB Service >  Print ServerLABEL DESCRIPTIONEnable print  server Select  this to have the VDSL Rout er share a USB print er.Printer  name Enter  t he nam e of the printer.Make and m odel Enter t he m anufact urer and m odel num ber of the print er.Apply/ Save Click t his to save your changes to the VDSL Rout er.
 Chapter 12 USB ServicesBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 167Figure 66   Media ServerThe following t able describes t he labels in t his m enu.Table 58   Media ServerLABEL DESCRIPTIONEnable digit al m edia serverSelect  this to have t he VDSL Rout er  function as a DLNA-compliant  media server so DLNA-compliant  m edia clients on your net work can play m edia files locat ed in t he shar es. Media Library Pat hEnter t he path client s use to access t he m edia files on a USB st orage device connected to the VDSL Rout er.Apply/ Save Click this to save your changes to t he VDSL Rout er.
Chapter 12 USB ServicesBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide168
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 169CHAPTER   13Certificates13.1  OverviewThe VDSL Router can use cert ificat es ( also called digit al I Ds)  t o authent icat e user s. Cert ificates are based on public- privat e key pairs. A certificate cont ains t he certificat e owner ’s ident ity and public key. Cert ificates provide a way to exchange public keys for  use in aut hent icat ion. 13.1.1  What You Can Do in this Chapter• Use the Loca l Ce rtifica t es screens t o generat e cer tificat ion request s and im port the VDSL Router's CA-signed certificates (Sect ion 13.4 on page 173) .• Use the Tru st ed CA screen to save the certificates of t rust ed CAs to t he VDSL Router (Sect ion 13.4 on page 173) .13.2  What You Need to KnowThe following t erm s and concept s m ay help as you read t hrough this chapt er.Certification Authority A Cert ification Aut horit y ( CA) issues certificates and guarantees the ident ity of each certificat e owner. There are com m ercial certification aut horit ies like CyberTrust or VeriSign and governm ent  certificat ion aut horit ies. The cert ificat ion aut horit y uses it s private key to sign cert ificates. Anyone can t hen use t he certificat ion aut horit y's public key t o verify the cer tificat es. You can use t he VDSL Router to generat e certificat ion request s t hat  contain ident ifying inform ation and public keys and then send t he certificat ion request s t o a certification aut horit y.13.3  The Local Certificates ScreenClick Advance d Setup >  Certifica t e to open the Loca l Ce rt ificate s screen. This screen displays the VDSL Router ’s list  of certificat es and certification request s.
Chapter 13 CertificatesBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide170Figure 67   Local Certificat es The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen. 13.3.1  Create Certificate Request Click the Local Ce rt ifica t es screen’s Cr eat e  Cer t ificate Requ est  button to open the following screen. Use t his screen to have the VDSL Router generat e a certificat ion request .Table 59   Local Certificat esLABEL DESCRIPTIONNam e This field displays the nam e used to identify  t his certificat e. I t is recom m ended that  you give each cert ificate a unique nam e. I n Use This field show s whet her or not t he VDSL Rout er  currently uses the cert ificat e.Subject This field displays ident ifying inform at ion about  t he cert ificat e’s owner, such as CN ( Com m on Nam e) , OU (Organizat ional Unit  or depart m ent ), O (Or ganizat ion or com pany)  and C (Country) . I t is recom m ended t hat  each cert ificate have unique subject  inform at ion. Type This field displays whet her t he entry is for a cert ificat e or  a cert ificat e request .Action Click the View  but ton t o open a screen wit h an in- dept h list  of inform at ion about  t he cert ificat e ( or cert ification request) .For a cert ificat ion request , click Load Signed to im port the signed cert ificate.Click the Re m ove  butt on t o delet e t he cert ificat e ( or cert ificat ion request) . You cannot delet e a cert ificat e that  one or  m ore features is configured to use.Creat e Cert ificate Requ estClick this but ton t o go to t he scr een where you can hav e t he VDSL Rout er generate a cer tificat ion request .I m por t Cert ificat e Click this but ton t o save the cer tificate that  you have enrolled from  a certificat ion authority from  your com puter t o t he VDSL Rout er.
 Chapter 13 CertificatesBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 171Figure 68   Creat e Certificate RequestThe following t able describes t he labels in t his screen. Aft er you click Apply, the following scr een displays to not ify you t hat  you need t o get t he certificat e request  signed by a Certificate Authority. I f you already have, click Load_ Signed to im port the signed certificate into the VDSL Router. Otherwise click Ba ck  to return t o t he Loca l Ce rt ifica t es screen. Table 60   Create Cert ificate RequestLABEL DESCRIPTIONCert ificat e Nam e Type up t o 63 ASCI I  charact ers ( not  including spaces)  t o identify this certificat e. Com m on Nam e  Select  Auto to have t he VDSL Router configure this field autom atically. Or select Cu st o m iz e t o ent er it  m anually. Type t he I P addr ess ( in dott ed decim al not ation) , dom ain nam e or e-m ail address in the field provided. The dom ain nam e or e-m ail address can be up t o 63 ASCI I  charact ers. The dom ain nam e or e- m ail address is for ident ificat ion purposes only and can be any str ing.Organizat ion Nam e Type up t o 63 charact ers to ident ify the com pany or group t o which the cert ificat e owner belongs. You m ay use any charact er, including spaces, but  the VDSL Router drops trailing spaces.St at e/ Province Nam e Type up t o 32 charact ers to ident ify the st at e or province wher e t he cer tificat e owner is locat ed. You m ay  use any charact er, including spaces, but the VDSL Rout er drops trailing spaces.Country/ Region Nam e Select  a country to identify the nat ion wher e t he certificat e owner  is located. Apply Click Ap ply t o save your changes.
Chapter 13 CertificatesBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide172Figure 69   Cert ificate Request  Created13.3.2  Load Signed Certificate Aft er you create a cert ificat e request  and have it signed by a Cert ificate Authority, in t he Loca l Ce r t if ica t e s screen click t he certificate request ’s Load Sign ed butt on t o im port the signed certificat e into the VDSL Router. Note:  You m ust  rem ove any spaces from  t he cert ificate’s filenam e before you can im port it .
 Chapter 13 CertificatesBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 173Figure 70   Load Signed Certificate The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen. 13.4  The Trusted CA ScreenClick Advance d Setup >  Cer tifica t e >  Trust e d CA t o open t he following screen. This screen displays a sum m ary list  of certificat es of t he certificat ion aut horit ies t hat  you have set  the VDSL Router to accept  as t rust ed. The VDSL Router accepts any valid certificat e signed by a certificat ion aut horit y on t his list  as being trust wort hy;  thus you do not need to im port  any certificat e t hat  is signed by one of these certification aut horit ies. Table 61   Load Signed CertificateLABEL DESCRIPTIONCert ificate Nam e This is t he nam e of the signed cert ificat e. Cert ificat e Copy and past e the signed cert ificat e int o the text  box t o st ore it  on the VDSL Rout er.Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Chapter 13 CertificatesBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide174Figure 71   Tr u st e d  CA  The following t able describes t he fields in this screen. 13.4.1  View Trusted CA CertificateClick the View  icon in the Tr ust e d CA screen t o open t he following screen. Use t his screen t o view  in- dept h inform at ion about t he certificat ion aut horit y’s certificat e.Table 62   Tr u st e d  CALABEL DESCRIPTIONNam e This field displays the nam e used to ident ify this certificat e. Subject This field displays infor m at ion t hat  ident ifies the ow ner of t he cert ificat e, such as Com m on Name ( CN) , OU ( Organizat ional Unit  or depart m ent) , Organizat ion ( O) , St at e (ST)  and Countr y ( C). I t is recom m ended t hat  each cert ificat e have unique subj ect  inform at ion.Type This field displays general inform ation about  the cer tificat e. ca m eans that  a Cert ificat ion Aut hority signed the certificat e. Act ion Click the View  icon t o open a screen with an in-depth list  of inform ation about  the cer tificate (or cert ificat ion request) .Click the Re m ove but ton to delet e the certificat e (or  cert ificat ion request ). You cannot delet e a cert ificat e that  one or m ore feat ures is configured to use.I m port CertificateClick this but ton t o open a scr een where you can save the cert ificat e of a cert ificat ion authority that  you t r ust  t o the VDSL Router.
 Chapter 13 CertificatesBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 175Figure 72   Tr u st e d  CA :  V i e w  The following t able describes t he fields in this screen. 13.4.2  Import Trusted CA CertificateClick the Tr uste d CA screen’s I m port  Cer t ificat e but ton t o open t he following screen. The VDSL Router tr ust s any valid certificat e signed by any of t he im port ed t rust ed CA certificates.Table 63   Tr u st e d  CA:  V i e wLABEL DESCRIPTIONNam e This field displays the identifying nam e of this certificat e. Type This field displays general inform ation about  the cer tificat e. ca m eans that  a Cert ificat ion Aut hority signed the certificat e. Subject This field displays infor m at ion t hat  ident ifies the ow ner of t he cert ificat e, such as Com m on Name ( CN) , Organizational Unit  (OU) , Organization ( O) and Country ( C).Cert ificat e This read- only text  box  displays t he cert ificat e in Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM)  form at . PEM uses base 64 t o convert  t he binary cert ificate int o a printable form . You can copy and past e t he cert ificate into an e- m ail t o send t o friends or colleagues or you can copy and past e the cert ificat e into a t ext edit or and save t he file on a m anagem ent com put er for lat er dist ribution ( via floppy disk for exam ple) .Back Click Ba ck  to return t o t he previous screen.
Chapter 13 CertificatesBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide176Figure 73   Tr ust ed CA:  Im port Cert ificate The following t able describes t he fields in this screen. Table 64   Trust ed CA:  I m port Cert ificateLABEL DESCRIPTIONCer tificat e Nam e Type a nam e for t he signed cert ificat e. Cert ificate Copy and past e the certificat e into t he t ext box t o st ore it  on the VDSL Router .Apply Click t his to save your changes.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 177CHAPTER   14Wireless14.1  Overview This chapt er describes t he VDSL Router’s N e t w or k Set t ing >  W ire less screens. Use t hese screens to set up your VDSL Router’s wireless connection.14.1.1  What You Can Do in this ChapterThis sect ion describes t he VDSL Router’s W ir ele ss scr eens. Use t hese screens t o set  up your  VDSL Router’s wireless connect ion.• Use the Ba sic screen t o enable the Wireless LAN, enter the SSI D and configure basic sett ings (Sect ion 14.2 on page 178) .• Use the Se curity screen to configure wireless security set tings m anually or t hrough WPS (Sect ion 14.3 on page 179) .• Use the M AC Filt er  screen t o allow or deny wireless client s based on t heir MAC addresses from connect ing t o t he VDSL Router (Sect ion 14.4 on page 183) .• Use the Advanced screen t o configure wireless advanced feat ures, such as t he RTS/ CTS Threshold ( Section 14.5 on page 184) .• Use the Stat ion I n fo screen t o display a list  of connect ed wireless client s (Sect ion 14.6 on page 186) .
Chapter 14 WirelessBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide17814.1.2  What You Need to KnowWireless Basics“ Wireless”  is essentially radio com m unicat ion. I n t he sam e way that walkie- t alkie radios send and receive inform at ion over the airwaves, w ireless net working devices exchange inform at ion with one another. A wireless net working device is j ust  like a radio t hat let s your com puter exchange inform ation with radios at tached to other com puters. Like walkie- talkies, m ost  wireless net working devices operat e at radio frequency bands t hat  are open t o t he public and do not  require a license t o use. However, w ireless net working is different  from that of m ost  t radit ional radio comm unicat ions in that  there a num ber of wireless networking st andards available with different m et hods of dat a encrypt ion.Finding Out MoreSee Sect ion 14.7 on page 186 for advanced technical inform ation on wireless net works.14.2  The Basic Screen Use t his screen t o enable t he Wireless LAN, ent er the SSI D and select  t he wireless security mode.Note:  I f you configure t he VDSL Router from  a com put er connected t o the wireless LAN and you change t he VDSL Router’s SSI D, channel or securit y settings, you lose your w ireless connect ion when you click Apply/ Save . Change the com put er’s wireless set t ings t o m atch the VDSL Router’s new settings.Click W ireless t o open the Ba sic screen.Figure 74   Wireless:  Basic
 Chapter 14 WirelessBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 179The following table describes t he general wireless LAN labels in t his scr een.14.3  Wireless SecurityClick W ireless >  Securit y t o open the Securit y screen. Set  N et w ork Aut he nt ication t o Ope n and W EP Encr yption  to D isabled t o allow wireless st ations to com m unicate wit h the VDSL Router without any dat a encrypt ion or authenticat ion.Note:  I f you do not  enable any wireless securit y on your VDSL Router, your network is accessible to any wireless net working device t hat is wit hin range.Table 65   Wireless:  BasicLABEL DESCRIPTIONWireless Network SetupEnable Wir eless Turn the wireless LAN on or  off.Hide Access PointSelect  this check box t o hide t he SSI D in t he out going beacon fram e so a st at ion cannot  obtain the SSI D t hr ough scanning using a sit e survey tool.Enable Wireless Mult icast Forwarding Select  t his check box t o convert wireless m ult icast  traffic into wir eless unicast  t raffic.SSI D The SSI D ( Service Set  IDent it y) identifies the service set wit h which a wireless device is associated and serves as a nam e for the wireless net work. Wireless devices associat ing to t he access point ( AP)  m ust  have t he sam e SSI D. Enter a descript ive nam e ( up to 32 English keyboard characters)  for t he wireless LAN. BSSI D This show s the MAC address of the wireless int erface on the VDSL Rout er when wireless LAN is enabled.Max Clients Set  a lim it for  how m any wireless client s can connect  to the VDSL Rout er at a t im e.Apply/ Save Click t his but t on to save your changes.
Chapter 14 WirelessBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide180Figure 75   Wireless:  Security
 Chapter 14 WirelessBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 181The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.Table 66   Wireless:  Securit yLABEL DESCRIPTIONEnable WPS Use WiFi Protected Set up (WPS)  to quickly set  up a wireless net wor k w it hout having to m anually configure set tings. Set  up each WPS connect ion bet ween t wo dev ices at  a tim e. WPS is not  available when using WPA or WPA 2.Add Client Use t his sect ion to add a wireless client  t o the wireless net w ork.Select Push - Bu t t on  to add a client  by pressing a but ton on the VDSL Rout er and t he wireless client . This is the easiest  m ethod.Select En te r STA PI N t o add a client  by enter ing t he client ’s Personal Identification Num ber  ( PI N)  in the field that  displays when you select  t his option.Select Use  AP PI N  to add a client by ent er ing t he AP’s PI N from  the De vice PI N field in the client ’s WPS configuration.Add Enrollee Click this to use WPS t o add a w ireless client t o your wireless net work.Note: You must also activate WPS on the client within two minutes.Set  WPS AP Mode Configured  uses t he VDSL Rout er’s current  wireless securit y set tings for WPS. Unconfigure d has the VDSL Rout er change it s wireless security set t ings when you do one of the following:• Add a wireless enrollee. The VDSL Router autom atically uses WPA2- PSK and a random  key. The W PS AP Mode aut om at ically changes to Configure d.• Use Se tu p AP to have an ext er nal regist rar ( like Window s Vist a)  configure the VDSL Router’s wireless securit y set tings. The W PS AP Mode automatically  changes t o Configured .• Manually configure t he VDSL Rout er’s wireless securit y set tings. Then you can m anually set  the W PS AP Mode t o Configure d.Device PI N This shows the VDSL Router’s PI N. Ent er this PI N in the ext ernal registrar within two m inut es of click ing Config AP.Enter t his PI N in the client’s WPS configuration if you select ed Use  AP PI N .Config AP Click Con fig AP t o have an ext ernal regist rar configure t he VDSL Router’s wireless securit y set tings. See Section 14.7.8 on page 198 for how to use Windows Vist a as an ext ernal regist rar. Pu sh But t on  and PI N  are reserved for future use and have no effect  at  t he t im e of w rit ing. Note: After you click Config AP you must enter the VDSL Router’s PIN in the external registrar within two minutes.WPS Wireless ER This is available when you set  t he W PS AP Mode t o Configure d.  Click En able/ Disa ble  to have an ext ernal r egist rar such as an I ntel wireless st ation use WPS t o add wireless client s and t hen authenticat e t hem  whenever they connect  to t he wireless net work. I f you used a Windows Vista com puter to configure the VDSL Router’s wireless set tings, you can also use the Window s Vista computer to add and authenticat e wireless clients without  using W PS W ire le ss ER. See Sect ion 14.7.8 on page 198 for details.Note: After you click Enable/Disable you must enter the VDSL Router’s PIN in the external registrar within two minutes. Then click Ena ble / Disa ble again.WPS 2.0 Select  t his t o support  WPS 2.0.
Chapter 14 WirelessBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide182Network Au t hent icationUse t he strongest aut hent ication m et hod t hat  the wireless clients all support . W PA2  or  W PA uses an ext ernal RADI US ser ver t o aut hent icat e a separat e user nam e and password for each user. While WPA2 offers t he st rongest  securit y, m ore wireless client s support WPA. Mixe d W PA2 / W PA supports WPA and WPA2 sim ultaneously.W PA2 - PSK or W PA- PSK uses a com m on password for all client s. While WPA2- PSK offers st ronger securit y, m ore wireless client s support WPA- PSK. Mixe d W PA2 / W PA - PSK suppor ts WPA2- PSK and WPA- PSK sim ult aneously.Choose Open  t o allow all w ir eless connections wit hout  authent ication.WPA2 Pr eau t hent icat ionThis field displays when you select  W PA2  or Mixe d W PA2 / W PA. Enable pre- aut hent ication for  fast  roam ing by allow ing a wireless client alr eady connect ed to an AP to perform  I EEE 802.1x authenticat ion wit h another AP before connect ing t o it . Network Re- auth I ntervalThis field displays when you select  W PA2  or Mixe d W PA2 / W PA. Specify how  oft en wireless stations have t o resend user nam es and passwords in order to st ay connected. I f wireless st at ion aut hent icat ion is done using a RADI US server, t he reaut henticat ion t im er  on t he RADI US server has priorit y.WPA Group Rekey I ntervalSet the rat e at  which the AP ( if using WPA( 2)- PSK key m anagem ent )  or RADI US server  (if using WPA( 2) key m anagem ent ) sends a new  group key out to all client s. The re- keying process is the WPA( 2) equivalent  of aut om atically  changing t he WEP key for an AP and all st at ions in a WLAN on a periodic basis. RADI US Server I P Address Enter t he I P address of the ext er nal aut hent icat ion server in dott ed decim al not ation.RADI US Port Ent er the por t num ber of the external authent ication server. The default  port number is 1 8 1 2 . You need not  change this value unless your net work adm inist rator inst ruct s you to do so with addit ional infor m at ion. RADI US Key Ent er a passwor d ( up to 31 alphanum eric charact er s) as the key t o be shared bet ween the ext er nal RADI US ser ver and t he VDSL Router. The key m ust  be the sam e on the RADI US server and your VDSL Rout er. The key is not  sent  over t he net work. WPA/ WAPI  EncryptionSelect t he encryption type (AES or TKI P+ AES)  for  dat a encryption.Select AES if your wireless clients can all use AES.Select TKI P+ AES to allow the wireless client s to use eit her TKI P or  AES.Generate password autom atically This field displays when you select  WPA( 2)- PSK.Select  this option to have t he VDSL Rout er  aut om at ically generat e a passwor d. The passwor d field becom es read- only.WPA/ WAPI  passphraseThis field displays when you select  WPA( 2)- PSK.Enter  16 to 63 alphanumeric charact ers (0- 9, A-Z, wit h no spaces) . I t m ust  contain bot h let ters and num ber s and is case- sensitive. Click the link to display the password.WEP Encryption This field displays when you set  Ne tw ork  Auth ent ica t ion to Open . Enable WEP encry pt ion t o scram ble t he wireless dat a transm issions bet ween the wireless st at ions and the access point s (AP)  to keep netw ork com m unicat ions privat e. Bot h the wireless st at ions and t he access point s m ust  use the sam e WEP key.Note: WEP is extremely insecure. Attackers can break it using widely-available software. It is strongly recommended that you use a more effective security mechanism.Encryption St rengt hI f y ou are using WEP encry pt ion, select 6 4 - bit  or  1 2 8 - bit to set  the lengt h of t he encry pt ion key. Table 66   Wireless:  Securit yLABEL DESCRIPTION
 Chapter 14 WirelessBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 18314.4  MAC Filter    Click W ireless >  MAC Filt er to open t he M AC Filt er  screen. This screen allows you t o configure the VDSL Router  to give exclusive access t o specific devices ( Allow )  or exclude specific devices from  accessing t he VDSL Router ( De ny) . Every Ether net  device has a unique MAC (Media Access Cont rol) address assigned at  t he fact ory. I t  consist s of six pairs of hexadecim al charact ers, for exam ple, 00: A0: C5: 00: 00: 02. You need to know t he MAC addresses of t he devices to configure this screen.Figure 76   Wireless >  MAC Authent icat ionThe following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.Cur rent  Networ k KeyThis field displays when you enable WEP encryption. Configure up t o four 64-bit  or 128-bit  WEP keys. Use this field t o select  w hich one the net work uses. Network Key 1~ 4 These fields display when you enable WEP encryption. WEP uses a net work key t o encrypt dat a. The VDSL Rout er and wireless client s m ust  use the sam e net work  key ( password) .I f you chose 6 4 - bit  WEP,  t hen ent er  any 5 ASCI I  charact ers or 10 hexadecim al charact er s ( "0-9", "A- F") .I f you chose 1 2 8- bit WEP, t hen enter 13 ASCI I  charact er s or  26 hexadecim al charact er s ( "0-9", "A- F") . You m ust  configure at  least  one password. Apply/ Save Click this but ton to save your changes.Table 66   Wireless:  Securit yLABEL DESCRIPTIONTable 67   Wireless >  MAC Aut hent icationLABEL DESCRIPTIONMAC Restrict Mode Define t he filter act ion for  t he list  of MAC addresses in the M AC Addr ess t able. Select  D isabled to t urn off MAC filt ering.Select  Allow  to perm it  access t o the VDSL Router. MAC addresses not listed will be denied access to t he VDSL Router. Select  De ny t o block access t o the VDSL Rout er. MAC addresses not list ed w ill be allowed to access the VDSL Rout er. MAC Address This displays the MAC addresses of the wir eless devices that are allowed or denied access to the VDSL Rout er.Rem ove Select  ent ries and click t he Rem ove  button t o delet e them . Add  Click this to add a new MAC address ent ry to the t able.
Chapter 14 WirelessBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide18414.4.1  The MAC Filter Add Screen     Use t his screen t o add MAC address entries. Click W ir ele ss >  MAC Filt er  >  Add to open t he following screen.Figure 77   Wireless >  MAC Filt er >  AddThe following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.14.5  The Advanced ScreenClick W ire less >  Advan ced t o configure advanced wireless set t ings. See Section 14.7.2 on page 188 for det ailed definit ions of t he t erm s list ed in t his screen.Figure 78   Wireless:  AdvancedTable 68   Wireless >  MAC Filter >  AddLABEL DESCRIPTIONMAC Address Enter  t he MAC address of the wireless device that  is t o be allow ed or denied access t o the VDSL Rout er . Ent er the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address form at , that  is, six hexadecim al charact er  pairs, for exam ple, 12: 34: 56: 78: 9a: bc.Save/ Apply Click t his butt on to save t he changes and have t he VDSL Router st art  using them .
 Chapter 14 WirelessBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 185The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen. Table 69   Wireless:  AdvancedLABEL DESCRIPTIONChannel  Set the channel depending on your par ticular region.Select  a channel or use Aut o t o have t he VDSL Rout er aut om at ically det erm ine a channel t o use. Changing the channel m ay help resolve wireless inter fer ence issues. Use a channel as m any channels away from  any channels used by neighboring APs as possible. The VDSL Rout er ’s current channel num ber displays next  to t his field.802.11n/ EWC  Select  Auto t o have t he VDSL Router aut om at ically use I EEE 802.11n t o connect I EEE 802. 11n client s. Disable this to not use I EEE 802.11n.Bandwidth This displays when you set 8 0 2 .1 1 n/ EW C to Aut o.Select  whet her t he VDSL Rout er  uses a wireless channel width of 2 0 M H z  or 4 0 MHz.A st andard 20MHz channel offers transfer speeds of up to 150Mbps wher eas a 40MHz channel uses two standard channels and offers speeds of up to 300 Mbps.40MHz (channel bonding or  dual channel) bonds two adj acent  radio channels to increase t hr oughput. The wireless clients m ust  also support  40 MHz. I t is oft en bet t er  t o use t he 20 MHz set ting in a locat ion where t he environm ent  hinders the wireless signal. Select  2 0 M Hz if you want  t o lessen radio int erference wit h other wireless devices in your neighborhood or the wireless client s do not support channel bonding.Control SidebandThis displays when you set 8 0 2 .1 1 n/ EW C to Aut o.This is available for some regions when you select  a specific channel and set  the Bandwidth field to 4 0 M Hz. Set whet her t he cont rol channel ( set in the Cha nnel field) should be in the Low e r or Upper  range of channel bands.802.11n Protect ionThis displays when you set 8 0 2 .1 1 n/ EW C to Aut o. Select  Aut o t o have the wireless devices transm it  dat a after  a RTS/ CTS handshake to help prevent collisions in m ixed-m ode netw orks (net works wit h both I EEE 802.11n and I EEE 802.11g or I EEE 802.11b traffic) .Select  Off to disable 802.11n prot ection. This can increase throughput in an I EEE 802.11n-only environm ent  alt hough it  m ay reduce t ransm ission rates if your network also has I EEE 802.11G and I EEE 802.11B client s.Mult icast Rate Select  a t ransm ission speed for  wireless m ult icast  t raffic.Fragm ent ation ThresholdThis is t he m aximum  dat a fragm ent  size t hat  can be sent . Enter  a value bet ween 256 and 2346. RTS Thr eshold Data wit h its fram e size larger  t han this value will perform  t he RTS ( Request  To Send)/ CTS ( Clear To Send) handshake. Enter a value bet ween 0 and 2347. 54g™ Mode This displays when you set  8 0 2 .1 1 n/ EW C to Disabled. Select  5 4 g Auto to allow  bot h I EEE 802.11G and I EEE 802.11B client s t o connect .Select  5 4 G Pe rform ance for the best  perform ance with I EEE 802.11G-certified clients.Select  5 4 G LRS (Lim it ed Rat e Support)  t o allow older  I EEE 802.11B client s wit h 3-Bit  m essage headers to connect. Only use t his if none of the ot her m odes work.Select  8 0 2 .1 1 b On ly if all your wir eless clients only support I EEE 802.11B.54g™ Prot ect ion This displays when you set 8 0 2 .1 1 n/ EW C to D isa bled . Select  Au to to have the wir eless devices transm it  dat a after  a RTS/ CTS handshake to help prevent collisions in m ixed-m ode net wor ks (net works wit h both IEEE 802.11g and I EEE 802.11b traffic) .Select  Off to disable 802.11g prot ect ion. Only  select this if you only connect  I EEE 802.11G client s.
Chapter 14 WirelessBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide18614.6  Wireless Station InfoThe st at ion m onitor displays the connect ion st atus of t he wireless client s connect ed t o ( or t rying to connect  to)  the VDSL Router . To open t he st at ion m onitor, click W ir ele ss  > Stat ion I nfo. The screen appear s as shown.Figure 79   Wireless  >  St at ion I nfoThe following t able describes t he labels in t his m enu.14.7  Technical ReferenceThis sect ion discusses wireless LANs in m ore dept h. 14.7.1  Wireless Network OverviewWireless net works consist of wireless client s, access points and bridges. Preamble Type This displays when you set 8 0 2 .1 1 n/ EW C to D isa ble d and 5 4 g™ M ode to 5 4 g Aut o or  8 0 2 .1 1 b Only. Select  a pream ble ty pe from  the drop-down list  box. Choices ar e Long or  Sh or t . See Sect ion 14.7.6 on page 192 for m ore inform at ion.Transm it Power  Set the output power of the VDSL Rout er. I f t here is a high density of APs in an area, decrease the out put power  t o reduce int er ference with ot her  APs. Select one of the follow ing:  2 0 % , 4 0 % , 6 0 % , 8 0 %  or 1 0 0 % . Apply/ Save Click  t his to save your  changes to the VDSL Router.Table 69   Wireless:  Advanced ( continued)LABEL DESCRIPTIONTable 70   Wireless  >  St at ion I nfoLABEL DESCRIPTIONMAC  This displays the MAC address (in XX: XX: XX: XX: XX: XX for m at )  of a connect ed wireless station. Associat ed This is the t im e t hat  the wir eless client  associat ed with the VDSL Rout er .Aut horized This is the t im e t hat t he wir eless client ’s connect ion t o t he VDSL Rout er was authorized.SSI D This is t he nam e of the wireless netw ork on the VDSL Rout er t o which the wireless client  is connect ed.I nter face This is t he nam e of the wireless LAN inter face on the VDSL Rout er t o which the wireless client is connected.Refresh Click this but ton to updat e the inform at ion in the screen.
 Chapter 14 WirelessBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 187• A wireless client  is a radio connect ed t o a user’s computer. • An access point is a radio wit h a wired connect ion to a net work, which can connect  with num erous wireless client s and let t hem  access the network. • A bridge is a radio t hat  relays comm unications bet ween access point s and wireless client s, ext ending a net work’s range. Traditionally, a wireless network operat es in one of t wo ways.• An “ infrast ruct ure”  t ype of network has one or m ore access points and one or m or e wireless clients. The wireless client s connect to t he access points.• An “ ad- hoc”  type of net work is one in which there is no access point. Wireless clients connect to one another in order to exchange inform at ion.The following figure provides an exam ple of a wireless net work.Figure 80   Exam ple of a Wireless Net workThe wireless network is t he part  in the blue circle. I n t his wireless net work, devices A and B use the access point ( AP)  t o interact  with t he other devices (such as t he printer)  or wit h the I nt ernet. Your VDSL Rout er is t he AP.Ever y wireless net work m ust  follow these basic guidelines.• Every device in the sam e wireless net work m ust  use t he same SSI D.The SSI D is the nam e of t he wireless net work. I t st ands for Service Set  I Dentifier.• I f two w ireless net works overlap, t hey should use a different channel.Like radio stat ions or television channels, each wireless network uses a specific channel, or frequency, t o send and receive inform ation.
Chapter 14 WirelessBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide188• Every device in t he sam e wireless net work m ust  use security com patible wit h the AP.Security st ops unauthorized devices from using the wireless net work. I t can also prot ect  the inform ation t hat  is sent  in t he wireless net work.Radio ChannelsI n the radio spect rum , there are certain frequency bands allocated for unlicensed, civilian use. For the purposes of wireless net working, t hese bands are divided int o num er ous channels. This allows a variet y of net works t o exist  in the sam e place wit hout  int erfer ing with one anot her. When you creat e a netw ork, you m ust  select  a channel to use. Since t he available unlicensed spectrum  varies from  one count ry to anot her, the num ber of available channels also varies. 14.7.2  Additional Wireless TermsThe following t able describes som e wireless net work term s and acronym s used in t he VDSL Router’s Web Configurator.14.7.3  Wireless Security OverviewBy their nat ure, radio comm unicat ions are sim ple t o intercept . For wireless dat a net works, t his m eans that  anyone wit hin range of a wireless net work without security can not only read t he dat a passing over t he airwaves, but  also j oin t he net work. Once an unaut horized person has access t o the net work, he or she can steal inform ation or int roduce m alware ( m alicious software) intended t o com prom ise t he net work. For t hese reasons, a variety of security syst em s have been developed t o ensure t hat only aut horized people can use a wireless dat a net work, or underst and the data carried on it.These security st andards do two things. First, they authenticat e. This m eans t hat  only people present ing t he right credentials ( oft en a usernam e and password, or a “ key”  phrase)  can access the net work. Second, t hey encrypt . This m eans t hat  the inform ation sent  over  the air is encoded. Only Table 71   Addit ional Wireless Term sTERM DESCRIPTIONRTS/ CTS Threshold I n a wireless net work which covers a large area, wireless dev ices are som et im es not  aware of each ot her ’s pr esence. This m ay cause t hem t o send inform ation t o t he AP at  t he sam e t im e and result  in inform at ion colliding and not get ting through.By set ting this value lower than the default  value, t he w ireless dev ices m ust  sometim es get  per m ission t o send inform at ion t o t he VDSL Router. The lower the value, the m ore oft en the devices m ust  get  perm ission.I f t his value is greater t han t he fragm entat ion threshold value (see below), then wir eless devices never have to get  per m ission t o send infor m at ion t o the VDSL Rou t er .Pream ble A pr eamble affects the t im ing in your wireless net work. There are tw o pream ble m odes:  long and short . I f a dev ice uses a different preamble m ode than t he VDSL Rout er does, it  cannot com m unicate with the VDSL Router.Aut hentication The process of verifying whet her a wireless device is allow ed to use t he w ireless netw ork.Fragm ent ation ThresholdA sm all fragm entation t hreshold is recom m ended for busy net works, while a larger threshold prov ides fast er  perform ance if the netw ork is not  very busy.
 Chapter 14 WirelessBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 189people wit h the code key can underst and the inform at ion, and only people who have been aut hent icat ed are given the code key.These security st andar ds vary in effectiveness. Some can be broken, such as t he old Wir ed Equivalent  Prot ocol (WEP) . Using WEP is bet t er t han using no securit y at  all, but  it will not  keep a determ ined at t acker out . Ot her security st andards are secure in themselves but can be broken if a user does not  use t hem  properly. For exam ple, the WPA-PSK security st andard is very secure if you use a long key which is difficult for an at tacker ’s soft ware t o guess - for exam ple, a t wenty- let t er long string of appar ent ly random  num bers and let t ers - but  it  is not  very secure if you use a short key which is very easy t o guess -  for exam ple, a t hree- letter word from  t he dict ionary.Because of t he dam age that  can be done by a m alicious at t acker, it ’s not  j ust  people who have sensit ive inform at ion on t heir net work who should use security. Everybody who uses any wireless net work should ensure that effect ive security is in place.A good way to com e up with effective security keys, passwords and so on is t o use obscure inform ation that  you personally will easily rem em ber, and to ent er it  in a way that appears random  and does not include real words. For exam ple, if your m other owns a 1970 Dodge Challenger and her favorite m ovie is Vanishing Point  ( which you know was m ade in 1971) you could use “ 70dodchal71vanpoi”  as your security key.The following sect ions introduce different  types of wireless security you can set  up in the wireless net work.14.7.3.1  SSIDNorm ally, the VDSL Router acts like a beacon and regularly broadcast s the SSI D in t he area. You can hide t he SSI D inst ead, in which case t he VDSL Router does not  broadcast the SSI D. I n addition, you should change t he default SSI D t o som et hing t hat  is difficult  t o guess.This t ype of security is fairly w eak, however, because t here are ways for unaut horized wireless devices t o get  t he SSI D. I n addition, unaut horized wireless devices can st ill see the inform at ion that  is sent  in t he wireless net work.14.7.3.2  MAC Address FilterEver y device t hat  can use a wireless network has a unique identificat ion num ber, called a MAC address.1 A MAC address is usually written using t welve hexadecim al charact ers2;  for exam ple, 00A0C5000002 or 00: A0: C5: 00: 00: 02. To get  the MAC address for each device in the w ireless net work, see t he device’s User’s Guide or ot her docum ent at ion.You can use the MAC address filt er to t ell t he VDSL Rout er which devices are allowed or not allowed to use t he wireless network. I f a device is allowed to use t he wireless net work, it still has t o have the correct inform at ion (SSI D, channel, and security). I f a device is not  allowed to use the wireless net work, it does not  m atter if it  has the correct  inform ation.This t ype of security does not  prot ect  the inform at ion t hat  is sent  in t he wireless network. Furt herm ore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get  the MAC address of an aut hor ized device. Then, t hey can use t hat  MAC address t o use t he wireless net work.1. Some wireless devices, such as scanners, can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks. These kinds of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses.2. Hexadecimal characters are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, and F.
Chapter 14 WirelessBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide19014.7.3.3  User AuthenticationAut hent ication is the process of ver ifying whet her a wireless device is allowed t o use t he wireless net work. You can m ake every user log in to the wireless net work before using it. However, every device in the wireless net work has t o support  I EEE 802.1x to do this.For  wireless net works, you can st ore the user nam es and passwords for each user in a RADI US server. This is a server used in businesses m ore than in homes. I f you do not  have a RADI US server, you cannot set  up user nam es and passwords for your users.Unaut horized wireless devices can st ill see the inform at ion that  is sent in the wireless net work, even if they cannot use t he wireless net work. Furtherm ore, there are ways for  unauthorized wireless users t o get  a valid user nam e and password. Then, they can use that user nam e and password t o use t he wireless net work.14.7.3.4  EncryptionWireless net works can use encryption t o protect the inform at ion that is sent in t he wireless net work. Encryption is like a secret  code. I f you do not  know the secret  code, you cannot underst and the m essage.The types of encryption you can choose depend on t he type of aut hent icat ion. ( See Sect ion 14.7.3.3 on page 190 for inform at ion about  t his.)For  exam ple, if the wireless net work has a RADI US server, you can choose W PA or W PA2 . I f users do not  log in to the wireless net work, you can choose no encryption, St a t ic W EP, W PA- PSK, or W PA2 - PSK.Usually, you should set  up the st rongest  encr yption t hat  every device in the wireless net work supports. For exam ple, suppose you have a wireless network wit h t he VDSL Router and you do not  have a RADI US server. Therefore, t here is no aut hentication. Suppose t he wireless net work has t wo devices. Device A only supports WEP, and device B suppor ts WEP and WPA. Therefore, you should set up St at ic W EP in t he wireless net work.Note:  I t is recom m ended t hat  wireless networks use W PA- PSK, W PA, or st ronger encrypt ion. The ot her t ypes of encryption are better than none at all, but  it is st ill possible for unaut horized wireless devices t o figure out  t he original inform at ion pretty quickly.When you select  W PA2  or W PA2 - PSK in your  VDSL Rout er , you can also select  an opt ion (W PA com pa tible) t o support WPA as well. I n t his case, if som e of t he devices support WPA and som e support WPA2, you should set  up W PA2 - PSK or W PA2  ( depending on the t ype of w ireless net work login)  and select  the W PA com pa t ible opt ion in t he VDSL Rout er.Table 72   Types of Encryption for Each Type of Aut henticationNO AUTHENTICATION RADIUS SERVERW eak est No Securit y WPASt at ic WEPWPA- PSKSt r onge st WPA2- PSK WPA2
 Chapter 14 WirelessBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 191Many t ypes of encrypt ion use a key to prot ect  the inform at ion in t he wireless net work. The longer the key, t he st ronger the encrypt ion. Every device in t he wireless network m ust  have t he sam e key.14.7.4  Signal ProblemsBecause wireless net works are radio networks, t heir signals are subject  t o lim itat ions of dist ance, int erference and absorption.Problem s with dist ance occur when t he t wo radios are too far apart. Pr oblem s with interference occur when ot her radio waves interrupt the data signal. I nt erference m ay come from  ot her radio transm issions, such as m ilitary or air traffic cont rol com m unicat ions, or from  m achines t hat  are coincidental em itters such as elect ric m otors or m icrowaves. Problem s with absorption occur when physical obj ect s ( such as t hick walls)  are between t he t wo radios, m uffling the signal.14.7.5  BSSA Basic Service Set ( BSS)  exist s when all com m unications between wireless st at ions or between a wireless st at ion and a wired net work client  go t hrough one access point ( AP) . I nt ra- BSS traffic is t raffic bet ween wireless st at ions in t he BSS. When I ntra-BSS traffic blocking is disabled, wireless stat ion A and B can access the wired net work and comm unicate wit h each other. When I ntra-BSS traffic blocking is enabled, wireless st at ion A and B can st ill access t he wired net work but cannot com m unicate wit h each ot her.Figure 81   Basic Service set
Chapter 14 WirelessBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide19214.7.6  Preamble TypePream ble is used t o signal that data is com ing t o the receiver. Short  and long refer t o the length of the synchronization field in a packet .Short pr eam ble increases perform ance as less tim e sending pream ble m eans m ore tim e for sending dat a. All I EEE 802.11 com pliant wir eless adapt ers support  long pream ble, but  not  all support  short pream ble. Use long pream ble if you are unsure what  pream ble m ode other wireless devices on t he net work support, and t o provide m ore reliable com m unicat ions in busy wireless net works. Use short pream ble if you are sure all wireless devices on t he net work support  it , and t o provide m ore efficient com m unicat ions.Use t he dynam ic set t ing t o autom at ically use shor t pream ble when all wireless devices on t he net work support  it , other wise t he VDSL Router uses long pream ble.Note:  The wireless devices MUST use t he sam e pream ble m ode in order to com municate.14.7.7  WiFi Protected Setup (WPS)Your VDSL Router support s WiFi Protected Set up (WPS) , which is an easy way to set  up a secure wireless net work. WPS is an indust ry standard specification, defined by the WiFi Alliance.WPS allows you to quickly set  up a wireless net work with st rong security, wit hout having to configure security set t ings m anually. Each WPS connect ion works bet ween two devices. Both devices m ust  support  WPS ( check each device’s docum entation t o m ake sure). Depending on the devices you have, you can either press a butt on (on the device it self, or  in its configurat ion utility) or ent er a PI N ( a unique Personal I dentificat ion Num ber that allow s one device to aut hent icat e t he other)  in each of t he t wo devices. When WPS is act ivated on a device, it  has t wo m inutes to find another device t hat  also has WPS act ivated. Then, the t wo devices connect and set  up a secure network by them selves.14.7.7.1  Push Button ConfigurationWPS Push But ton Configurat ion (PBC) is init iated by pressing a but ton on each WPS- enabled device, and allowing t hem  to connect autom at ically. You do not need t o ent er any inform at ion. Not every WPS- enabled device has a physical WPS butt on. Som e m ay have a WPS PBC button in their configuration utilities inst ead of or in addition t o the physical butt on.Take t he following steps t o set  up WPS using the butt on.1Ensure t hat t he t wo devices you want to set  up are within wireless range of one another. 2Look for a WPS but t on on each device. I f the device does not have one, log int o its configuration utility and locate the but ton ( see t he device’s User ’s Guide for how to do this -  for the VDSL Router , see Sect ion 14.5 on page 184) .3Press t he button on one of the devices ( it doesn’t m at t er which) . For the VDSL Router  you m ust  press the W ifi butt on for 10 seconds.
 Chapter 14 WirelessBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 1934Within two m inutes, press the butt on on the other device. The regist rar sends the net work nam e ( SSI D)  and security key t hrough an secure connect ion to the enrollee.I f you need t o m ake sure t hat  WPS worked, check the list  of associated wireless client s in the AP’s configurat ion utility. I f you see the wireless client  in t he list, WPS was successful.14.7.7.2  PIN ConfigurationEach WPS- enabled device has its own PI N ( Personal I dentificat ion Num ber). This m ay either  be st atic ( it  cannot be changed)  or dynam ic (in som e devices you can generate a new PI N by clicking on a but ton in t he configuration interface) . Use t he PI N m ethod inst ead of t he push- but ton configurat ion (PBC) met hod if you want to ensure that  the connect ion is est ablished bet ween t he devices you specify, not  just the first  t wo devices t o act ivate WPS in range of each ot her. How ever, you need t o log int o the configuration interfaces of bot h devices t o use t he PI N m ethod.When you use t he PI N m et hod, you m ust  enter t he PI N from one device ( usually t he wireless client) int o t he second device ( usually t he Access Point  or wireless router). Then, when WPS is act ivated on t he first  device, it presents its PI N t o t he second device. I f t he PI N m atches, one device sends the net work and security inform at ion to the other, allowing it t o j oin t he net work.Take t he following steps t o set  up a WPS connection between an access point or wir eless router ( referred to here as the AP)  and a client  device using t he PI N m et hod.1Ensure WPS is enabled on bot h devices.2Access the WPS sect ion of t he AP’s configurat ion int erface. See the device’s User’s Guide for how to do t his. 3Look for the client’s WPS PI N;  it  will be displayed either on t he device, or in the WPS sect ion of the client’s configurat ion int erface (see the device’s User’s Guide for how to find the WPS PI N -  for the VDSL Rout er , see Sect ion 14.3 on page 179) .4Enter t he client ’s PI N in t he AP’s configuration interface.5I f the client device’s configurat ion int erface has an area for entering anot her device’s PI N, you can either ent er t he client ’s PI N in the AP, or enter t he AP’s PI N in the client  -  it does not  m att er  which. 6St art WPS on bot h devices wit hin t wo m inutes. 7Use t he configuration ut ility t o act ivate WPS, not  the push- butt on on the device itself.8On a com put er connect ed to the wireless client , t ry t o connect  to t he I nt ernet. I f you can connect , WPS was successful.I f you cannot connect, check the list  of associat ed wireless client s in the AP’s configuration ut ility. I f you see the wireless client  in t he list , WPS was successful.The following figure shows a WPS- enabled wireless client  ( inst alled in a not ebook com puter) connect ing t o t he WPS- enabled AP via t he PI N m ethod.
Chapter 14 WirelessBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide194Figure 82   Exam ple WPS Process:  PI N Met hod14.7.7.3  How WPS WorksWhen t wo WPS- enabled devices connect , each device m ust  assum e a specific role. One device acts as t he regist rar ( t he device t hat  supplies net work and security set t ings)  and the other device acts as the enrollee ( the device t hat receives net work and security set t ings. The regist rar creates a secure EAP ( Extensible Aut hent ication Protocol) tunnel and sends t he net work nam e ( SSI D) and the WPA-PSK or WPA2- PSK pre- shared key t o t he enrollee. Whet her WPA- PSK or  WPA2- PSK is used depends on t he st andards supported by the devices. I f t he regist rar is already part  of a network, it sends t he exist ing inform at ion. I f not, it generates t he SSI D and WPA( 2) - PSK random ly.The following figure shows a WPS- enabled client ( inst alled in a not ebook com puter)  connect ing to a WPS- enabled access point.ENROLLEESECURE EAP TUNNELSSIDWPA(2)-PSKWITHIN 2 MINUTESCOMMUNICATIONThis device’s WPSEnter WPS PIN  WPSfrom other device: WPS PIN: 123456WPSSTARTWPSSTARTREGISTRAR
 Chapter 14 WirelessBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 195Figure 83   How WPS w orksThe roles of regist rar and enrollee last  only as long as t he WPS setup process is act ive ( t wo m inutes) . The next t im e you use WPS, a different  device can be t he regist rar if necessary.The WPS connect ion process is like a handshake;  only t wo devices part icipate in each WPS transact ion. I f you want  to add m ore devices you should repeat  t he process with one of t he exist ing net worked devices and the new  device.Note that the access point ( AP)  is not always the registrar, and t he wireless client  is not  always t he enrollee. All WPS- certified APs can be a regist rar, and so can som e WPS- enabled wireless clients.By default , a WPS devices is “ unconfigured”. This m eans t hat  it is not part of an exist ing net work and can act  as either enrollee or regist rar (if it support s bot h funct ions) . I f t he regist rar is unconfigured, the security set t ings it transm its t o t he enrollee are random ly-generated. Once a WPS- enabled device has connect ed t o anot her device using WPS, it  becom es “ configured”. A configured wireless client  can st ill act as enrollee or regist rar in subsequent  WPS connections, but a configured access point can no longer act  as enrollee. I t  will be t he regist rar in all subsequent  WPS connect ions in which it  is involved. If you want  a configured AP t o act  as an enrollee, you m ust  reset it  t o its fact ory defaults.14.7.7.4  Example WPS Network SetupThis sect ion shows how  security sett ings are dist ribut ed in an exam ple WPS setup.The following figure shows an exam ple network. I n st ep 1, both AP1  and Client  1  are unconfigured. When WPS is act ivat ed on both, they perform  t he handshake. In this exam ple, AP1  is t he regist rar, and Clie nt 1  is t he enrollee. The regist rar random ly generates the security inform ation t o set up the network, since it is unconfigured and has no exist ing inform ation.SECURE TUNNELSECURITY INFOWITHIN 2 MINUTESCOMMUNICATIONACTIVATEWPSACTIVATEWPSWPS HANDSHAKEREGISTRARENROLLEE
Chapter 14 WirelessBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide196Figure 84   WPS:  Exam ple Net work St ep 1I n step 2 , you add another wireless client  t o t he net work. You know that  Client 1  support s regist rar m ode, but  it is bet t er to use AP1  for the WPS handshake wit h the new  client  since you m ust  connect  to t he access point  anyway in order to use the network. I n t his case, AP1  m ust  be t he regist rar, since it is configured (it  already has security inform at ion for the network). AP1  supplies the exist ing security infor m ation to Clie nt 2 .Figure 85   WPS:  Exam ple Net work St ep 2I n step 3, you add another access point (AP2 ) to your network. AP2  is out of range of AP1 , so you cannot  use AP1  for t he WPS handshake wit h t he new access point. However, you know that Client  2 support s the regist rar funct ion, so you use it t o perform  t he WPS handshake inst ead.REGISTRARENROLLEESECURITY INFOCLIENT 1 AP1REGISTRARCLIENT 1 AP1ENROLLEECLIENT 2EXISTING CONNECTIONSECURITY INFO
 Chapter 14 WirelessBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 197Figure 86   WPS:  Exam ple Net work St ep 314.7.7.5  Limitations of WPSWPS has som e lim itat ions of which you should be aware. • WPS works in I nfrastruct ure net works only ( where an AP and a wireless client  com m unicat e). I t does not work in Ad- Hoc net works ( wher e there is no AP) .• When you use WPS, it  works bet ween two devices only. You cannot enroll m ultiple devices sim ult aneously, you m ust enroll one aft er t he ot her. For  inst ance, if you have two enrollees and one regist rar you m ust set  up the first  enrollee ( by pressing the WPS butt on on the r egist rar and t he first  enrollee, for exam ple) , then check t hat it successfully enrolled, then set up the second device in the sam e way.• WPS works only wit h ot her WPS- enabled devices. However, you can st ill add non-WPS devices t o a net work you already set  up using WPS. WPS works by aut om atically issuing a random ly-generated WPA- PSK or WPA2- PSK pre- shared key from  t he regist rar device t o t he enrollee devices. Whether t he net work uses WPA-PSK or WPA2- PSK depends on t he device. You can check t he configurat ion int erface of the regist rar device t o discover the key the network is using (if t he device supports t his feature) . Then, you can ent er the key int o the non-WPS device and j oin the net work as norm al (t he non-WPS device m ust also support  WPA-PSK or WPA2- PSK) .• When you use the PBC m et hod, t here is a short period ( from  t he m om ent  you press t he butt on on one device t o the mom ent you press the butt on on the other device)  when any WPS- enabled device could join t he net work. This is because t he regist rar has no way of ident ifying t he “ correct ”  enrollee, and cannot different iate between your enrollee and a rogue device. This is a possible way for a hacker to gain access t o a network.You can easily check t o see if this has happened. WPS works bet ween only two devices sim ultaneously, so if another device has enrolled your device w ill be unable t o enroll, and will not  have access t o the network. I f this happens, open t he access point’s configuration interface and look at  t he list  of associat ed client s ( usually displayed by MAC address) . I t does not  m att er if the CLIENT 1 AP1REGISTRARCLIENT 2EXISTING CONNECTIONSECURITY INFOENROLLEEAP2EXISTING CONNECTION
Chapter 14 WirelessBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide198access point is the WPS regist rar, the enrollee, or was not  involved in t he WPS handshake;  a rogue device m ust  st ill associate wit h the access point to gain access to the net work. Check the MAC addresses of your wireless clients ( usually print ed on a label on t he bott om  of t he device) . I f there is an unknown MAC address you can rem ove it or reset  t he AP. 14.7.8  Vista as a WPS External RegistrarUse an Ethernet  cable to connect a Windows Vist a com puter directly t o one of t he VDSL Router’s Et hernet ports t o let the com put er give wireless set t ings t o the VDSL Router and then lat er to wireless client s using t he WPS PI N m ethod. Figure 87   Windows Vista Com put er  Connect ed to a VDSL Rout er Et hernet  Port14.7.8.1  Vista Configuring the VDSL Router’s Wireless Settings1Go t o t he VDSL Router’s W ire less >  Secu rit y scr een and copy the VDSL Router’s ident ification PI N. 2I n Windows Vist a, go to your network connections and double-click t he ZyXEL AP icon t o open t he Windows Connect Now (WCN)  screens. 3Enter t he VDSL Router’s ident ification PI N and click N e x t . The com puter tells t he VDSL Router what  wireless net work set t ings to use.14.7.8.2  Vista Adding and Authenticating Wireless ClientsAft er a Windows Vist a com put er configures the VDSL Rout er’s wireless set t ings, the sam e com puter  can use WPS to add wireless client s t o t he network. The com puter  also authenticat es them  when they connect  t o t he wireless net work.  1I n the wireless client ’s configurat ion utility, select  t he opt ion to use its PI N t o add it  t o t he wireless net work. Note:  Aft er t he wireless client st arts WPS configurat ion, you have t wo m inutes t o ent er the PI N in t he Windows Vist a com puter. 2I n the Windows Vista net work connect ions, an icon for the wireless client  displays. Double- click it, ent er t he wireless client ’s PI N, and click N e x t .
 Chapter 14 WirelessBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 1993The Windows Vist a com puter uses WPS t o give t he wireless client t he wireless net work’s settings. Aft er the wireless client ’s wireless set t ings are configured, the Windows Vist a computer  aut hent icat es t hem  whenever they connect  to the wireless net work. 4Aft er the WPS process finishes (the enrollee is able to access the VDSL Router)  you can repeat  these steps to add m ore wireless client s one at  a t im e.
Chapter 14 WirelessBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide200
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 201CHAPTER  15 Voice15.1  OverviewUse t his chapter t o:• Connect  an analog phone t o the VDSL Router.• Make phone calls over the I nt ernet, as well as the regular phone net work.• Configure set t ings such as speed dial.• Configure network settings t o opt im ize t he voice qualit y of your phone calls.15.1.1  What You Can Do in this ChapterThese screens allow you t o configure your VDSL Router to m ake phone calls over the I nt ernet  and your regular phone line, and to set up t he phones you connect  t o the VDSL Router.• Use the SI P Account screen (Sect ion 15.3 on page 203)  t o set up inform at ion about your SI P account, cont rol which SI P accounts t he phones connected t o the VDSL Router use and configure audio settings such as volum e levels for t he phones connect ed to t he ZyXEL Device.• Use the SI P Se rvice Provide r  screen ( Sect ion 15.4 on page 209)  t o configure the SI P server inform at ion, QoS for VoI P calls, the num ber s for certain phone funct ions, and dialing plan. • Use the Region screen (Sect ion 15.5 on page 216)  to change set t ings that  depend on t he country you are in.• Use the Ca ll Rule screen (Section 15.6 on page 217)  t o set up short cuts for dialing frequently-used ( VoI P)  phone num bers.• Use the Su m m a ry screen ( Sect ion 15.7 on page 219)  t o view t he sum m ary list  of received, dialed and m issed calls.• Use the Ou t going  screen ( Sect ion 15.8 on page 219)  t o view detailed inform at ion for each outgoing call you m ade.• Use the I ncom ing screen (Sect ion 15.9 on page 220)  to view det ailed inform ation for each incom ing call from  som eone calling you.
Chapter 15 VoiceBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide202You don’t necessarily need to use all t hese screens t o set up your account. I n fact , if your service provider did not  supply inform ation on a part icular field in a screen, it is usually best  to leave it at it s default  setting.15.1.2  What You Need to Know About VoIPVoIPVoI P st ands for Voice over I P. I P is t he I nternet Protocol, which is t he m essage-carrying st andard t he I nternet  runs on. So, Voice over I P is t he sending of voice signals ( speech)  over t he I nt ernet (or anot her network t hat uses t he I nternet  Prot ocol) .SIPSI P st ands for Session I nit iat ion Protocol. SI P is a signalling standard t hat  let s one netw ork device (like a com put er or t he VDSL Rout er)  send m essages t o another. I n VoI P, these m essages are about  phone calls over the network. For exam ple, when you dial a num ber on your VDSL Rout er, it sends a SI P m essage over t he netw ork asking the other device ( the num ber you dialed) to take part in the call. SIP AccountsA SI P account  is a type of VoI P account . I t is an arrangem ent with a service provider t hat  lets you m ake phone calls over the I nternet . When you set the VDSL Router to use your SI P account t o m ake calls, t he VDSL Router is able to send all the inform at ion about  t he phone call to your service provider on the I nt ernet.St rict ly speaking, you don’t  need a SI P account. I t is possible for one SI P device ( like the VDSL Router)  t o call another wit hout involving a SI P service provider. However, the networking difficulties involved in doing t his m ake it  t rem endously im pract ical under norm al circum st ances. Your SI P account  provider rem oves t hese difficulties by taking care of t he call routing and setup - figuring out  how to get  your call to the right  place in a way t hat you and the other person can talk t o one anot her. How to Find Out MoreSee Chapt er 2 on page 19 for a t ut orial showing how to set  up t hese screens in an exam ple scenario.See Sect ion 15.10 on page 221 for advanced technical inform at ion on SI P.
 Chapter 15 VoiceBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 20315.2  Before You Begin• Before you can use t hese screens, you need to have a VoI P account already set up. I f you don’t have one yet, you can sign up with a VoI P service pr ovider over the I nt ernet. • You should have the inform at ion your VoI P service provider gave you ready, before you start t o configure t he VDSL Rout er.15.3  The SIP Settings Screen The VDSL Rout er uses a SI P account to m ake out going VoI P calls and check if an incom ing call’s dest inat ion num ber m at ches your SI P account ’s SI P num ber. I n order to m ake or receive a VoI P call, you need t o enable and configure a SI P account , and m ap it to a phone port. The SI P account  contains inform at ion that  allows your VDSL Router to connect to your VoI P service provider. Use t his screen to m aint ain inform ation about  each SI P account . You can also enable and disable each SI P account. To access t his screen, click VOI P >  SI P >  SI P Account.Figure 88   VOIP > SIP > SIP Account
Chapter 15 VoiceBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide204
 Chapter 15 VoiceBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 205Each field is described in t he following table.Table 73   VOIP > SIP > SIP AccountLABEL DESCRIPTIONService Provider Select ion Select  the SI P service provider profile you want to use for  the SI P account  you configure in t his screen. I f you change t his field, the screen aut om at ically refreshes.SI P Account Select ionSelect  the SI P account you want  to see in t his screen. I f you change t his field, the screen autom atically refreshes.Select  AD D _ N EW  t o creat e a new SI P account  on t he VDSL Router.Delet e Click t his but t on t o rem ove t he SI P account select ed in the SI P Account  Sele ct ion field.This button is not  available when you select  AD D _ N EW  in t he SI P Account  Sele ct ion field.GeneralEnable SI P AccountSelect  this if you want the VDSL Router to use t his account. Clear it  if you do not want t he VDSL Rout er to use t his account.SI P Account Num berEnter your SI P num ber. I n t he full SI P URI, this is the part before t he @ sym bol.  You can use up to 127 printable ASCI I  charact ers.Aut hent icationUser Nam e Enter the user nam e for registering t his SI P account, exact ly as it  was given t o you. You can use up to 95 print able ASCII  charact er s.Passw ord Ent er  the user nam e for regist ering this SI P account , exactly as it was given t o you. You can use up to 95 print able ASCII  Ext ended set charact ers.Apply To Phone Select  a phone port on which you want to m ake or receive phone calls for this SI P account.I f you m ap a phone port to m ore than one SI P account, there is no way to dist inguish bet ween t he SI P accounts when you receive phone calls. The VDSL Rout er uses t he m ost  recent ly registered SI P account  fir st  when you m ake an outgoing call.I f a phone port  is not  m apped t o a SI P account , you cannot receive or m ake any calls on t he phone connect ed t o t his phone port.Advanced/ Basic Click Advance d t o display and edit  m ore inform at ion for the SI P account . Click Ba sic to display and configure t he basic SI P account sett ings.URI  Type Select whet her or not t o include t he SI P service dom ain nam e when t he VDSL Router sends t he SI P num ber.SI P - include t he SI P service dom ain nam e.TEL -  do not  include t he SI P service dom ain nam e.Voice Feat u r e s
Chapter 15 VoiceBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide206Prim ary Com pression Ty p eSecondary Com pression Ty p eThir d Com pression Ty p eSelect  the t ype of voice coder/ decoder (codec)  that you want the VDSL Router to use. G.711 provides high voice qualit y but requires m ore bandwidth (64 kbps) . G.711 is t he default codec used by phone com panies and digit al han dset s.•G.7 1 1 a  is t ypically used in Europe.•G.7 1 1 u is typically used in Nort h Am erica and Japan.G.7 2 2  is a 7 KHz wideband voice codec t hat  operates at 48, 56 and 64 kbps. By using a sam ple rat e of 16 kHz, G.722 can provide higher fidelit y and bet t er audio quality than narrowband codecs like G.711, in which the voice signal is sam pled at 8 KHz.G.7 2 6  operates at  2 4  or 3 2  kbps.The VDSL Rout er m ust  use t he same codec as t he peer. When two SI P devices start  a SI P session, t hey m ust  agree on a codec.Select  the VDSL Router’s first  choice for voice coder/ decoder.Select  the VDSL Router’s second choice for voice coder/ decoder. Select N on e  if you only want  the VDSL Rout er to accept  t he first  choice.Select  the VDSL Router’s t hird choice for voice coder/ decoder. Select N on e  if you only want  the VDSL Router to accept  the first  or second choice.Speaking Volum e Cont rol Enter t he loudness t hat  the VDSL Router uses for speech that it  sends to the peer device. Min im um  is the quiet est , and M axim um  is the loudest .List ening Volum e Cont rol Enter t he loudness t hat  the VDSL Router uses for  speech t hat  it  receives from  the peer device.Min im um  is the quiet est , and M axim um  is the loudest .Enable G.168 ( Echo Cancellation)  Select  this if you want  to elim inat e t he echo caused by the sound of your voice reverberat ing in t he t elephone receiver while you t alk.Enable VAD ( Voice Act ive Detect or)Select  this if the VDSL Router should stop transm it t ing when you are not  speaking. This reduces the bandwidth t he VDSL Router uses.Call Features Send  Caller  I D  Select  this if you want  to send ident ification when you m ake VoI P phone calls. Clear this if you do not want to send ident ification.Enable Call Tr a n s f e rSelect  this to enable call transfer on the VDSL Router. This allows you to transfer an incom ing call ( t hat  you have answered)  to another phone.Enable Call Waiting Select  this t o enable call wait ing on the VDSL Router. This allows you to place a call on hold w hile you answer another incom ing call on t he sam e telephone num ber.Call Waiting Rej ect  Tim erSpecify a tim e of seconds that the VDSL Router waits befor e reject ing the second call if you do not  answer it .Table 73   VOIP > SIP > SIP Account (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
 Chapter 15 VoiceBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 207Enable Unconditional For w ar dSelect  this if you want  the VDSL Rout er to forward all incom ing calls to the specified phone num ber. Specify the phone num ber in the To Num ber field on t he right.Enable Busy For w ar dSelect  this if you want  t he VDSL Rout er to forward incoming calls t o t he specified phone num ber if the phone port is busy. Specify the phone num ber in the To Num ber field on t he right.I f you have call wait ing, t he incom ing call is forwarded t o t he specified phone num ber if you reject  or ignore the second incom ing call.Enable No Answ er  For war d Select  this if you want  t he VDSL Rout er to forward incoming calls t o t he specified phone num ber if t he call is unanswered. (See N o Answ er Tim e.)  Specify the phone num ber in the To Num ber field on t he right.No Answer  Tim eThis field is used by t he Act ive  N o Answ er  Forw ard feature.Ent er the num ber of seconds the VDSL Rout er  should wait for you to answer an incom ing call before it considers t he call is unanswered.Enable Do Not Dist urbSelect  this t o set  your phone to not  ring w hen som eone calls you.Enable Call Com plet ion on Bu sy  Su bscr ib er  ( CCBS)When you m ake a phone call but hear a busy tone, Call Com plet ion on Busy Subscriber (CCBS)  allows you to enable aut o-callback by pressing 5 and hanging up the phone. The VDSL Router then t ries to call t hat  phone num ber every m inute since after you hang up the phone. When the called part y becom es available w it hin t he CCBS tim eout period ( 60 m inutes by default ), both phones ring.• I f t he called part y’s phone rings because of CCBS but no one answers t he phone after 180 seconds, you will hear a busy t one.  You can enable CCBS on t he called num ber again.• I f you m anually call t he num ber on which you have enabled CCBS before t he CCBS t im eout period expires, t he VDSL Router disables CCBS on the called num ber.• I f you call a second num ber before t he first  called num ber ’s CCBS tim eout period expires, the VDSL Router st ops calling the first  num ber unt il you finish the second call.Select  this opt ion to act ivate CCBS on t he VDSL Router.MWI  (Message Waiting I ndication)  Select  this if you want  to hear a waiting ( beeping) dial t one on your phone when you have at  least  one voice m essage. Your VoI P service provider m ust  support t his feature.Expiration Tim e  Keep the default  value for this field, unless your VoI P service provider tells you to change it . Enter the num ber of seconds the SI P server should provide t he m essage wait ing service each tim e the VDSL Router subscribes to t he service. Before this tim e passes, t he VDSL Router aut om at ically subscribes again.Hot  Line /  War m  Line EnableSelect  this t o enable the hot line or warm  line feature on t he VDSL Rou t er .Warm  Line Select  this t o have the VDSL Router dial the specified warm  line num ber  aft er you pick up the t elephone and do not press any keys on t he keypad for a period of tim e.Table 73   VOIP > SIP > SIP Account (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 15 VoiceBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide208Hot  Line Select  this to have the VDSL Rout er  dial the specified hot  line num ber im m ediately when you pick up t he t elephone.Hot  Line /  War m  Line num berEnter t he num ber of the hot line or warm  line that  you want the VDSL Rou t er  t o dial.War m  Line Timer Enter a num ber of seconds that the VDSL Router waits before dialing the warm  line num ber if you pick up the t elephone and do not  press any keys on the keypad.Apply Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the VDSL Router.Cancel Click t his to set every field in this screen to it s last-saved value.Table 73   VOIP > SIP > SIP Account (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
 Chapter 15 VoiceBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 20915.4  The SIP Service Provider Screen Click V OI P >  SI P >  SI P Se rvice  Provider  t o open the SI P Ser vice  Provider screen. Use this screen to configure t he SI P server  inform at ion, QoS for VoI P calls, the num bers for certain phone funct ions, and dialing plan. Figure 89   VOIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider
Chapter 15 VoiceBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide210Each field is described in t he following table.Table 74   VoIP > SIP > SIP Service ProviderLABEL DESCRIPTIONService Provider Select ion Select  the SI P ser vice provider profile you want  to see in this screen. I f you change t his field, the screen aut om at ically refreshes.Select  AD D _ N EW  t o creat e a new  SI P ser vice provider profile on t he VDSL Rout er.Delet e Click t his but t on t o rem ove t he SI P service provider profile selected in the Se rvice  Pr ovide r Select ion field.This button is not available when you select AD D _ N EW  in t he Ser vice  Provide r Se lect ion.
 Chapter 15 VoiceBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 211GeneralSI P Service Provider Nam eEnter a descriptive nam e of up t o 63 printable characters for this SI P service provider profile. Spaces are not  allowed.SI P Local Port Enter t he VDSL Router’s list ening port num ber, if your VoI P service provider gave you one. Otherwise, keep t he default value.SI P Ser ver AddressEnter t he I P address or dom ain nam e of the SI P server provided by your  VoI P service provider. You can use up t o 95 printable ASCI I  charact ers. I t  does not  m att er whet her t he SI P server is a proxy, redirect  or regist er server.SI P Server Port Ent er the SI P server ’s list ening port num ber, if your VoI P service provider gave you one. Otherwise, keep t he default value.REGI STER Server AddressEnter t he I P address or dom ain nam e of the SI P regist er server, if your VoI P service provider gave you one. Ot herwise, ent er the sam e address you ent ered in t he SI P Ser ve r Addr ess field. You can use up to 95 print able ASCI I  characters.REGI STER Server PortEnt er the SI P regist er server’s list ening port  num ber, if your VoI P service provider gave you one. Otherwise, ent er the sam e port num ber you ent ered in t he SI P Ser ve r Port field.SI P Service Dom ainEnter t he SI P service dom ain nam e. I n the full SI P URI , t his is t he part  aft er the @ sym bol.  You can use up to 127 printable ASCI I  Extended set charact ers.RFC supportSupport Locating SI P Server (RFC 3263)  Select  this opt ion to have the VDSL Router use DNS procedures t o resolve t he SI P dom ain and find t he SI P server ’s I P address, port num ber and support ed transport prot ocol( s) .The VDSL Rout er  first  uses DNS Nam e Aut horit y Pointer ( NAPTR) records t o det erm ine the t ransport prot ocols supported by t he SI P server. I t then perform s DNS Service ( SRV) query to det erm ine t he port num ber  for t he prot ocol. The VDSL Router resolves t he SI P server ’s I P address by a st andard DNS address record lookup.The SI P Server  Port  and REGI STER Server Port fields are grayed out  and not  applicable and t he Tra nsport  Type can also be set  t o AUTO if you select this opt ion.RFC 3262  RFC 3262 defines a m echanism  t o provide reliable t ransm ission of SI P provisional response m essages, which convey inform ation on t he processing progress of t he request. This uses the option t ag 100rel and the Provisional Response ACKnowledgem ent  (PRACK)  m ethod. Select  this t o have the VDSL Router include a SI P Require/ Support ed header field wit h the option t ag 100rel in all I NVI TE   requests. When the VDSL Rout er  receives a SI P response m essage indicating that t he phone it called is ringing, the VDSL Router  sends a PRACK m essage t o have both sides confirm  t he m essage is received. I f you select  this opt ion, t he peer device should also support  t he opt ion tag 100rel to send provisional responses reliably.VoI P I OP Flags Use t his sect ion to m odify the header or som e inform ation in SI P m essages in order t o resolve int eroperability issues with som e SI P servers.Table 74   VoIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 15 VoiceBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide21223’ in SI P m essagesReplace a dial digit  “ # ” wit h “ % 23”  in the I NVI TE m essages.Rem ove ‘: 5060’ and 'transport= udp' from  request-uri in SI P m essages Rem ove “ : 5060”  and “ t ransport= udp”  from  the “ Request- URI ”  st ring in the REGI STER and I NVI TE packets.Rem ove t he 'Route' header in SI P m essages Rem ove t he 'Route' header in SI P packets. Don't send re-I nvite to the rem ote party when t here are m ultiple codecs answered in t he SDPDo not send a re-I nvite packet  t o t he rem ote party when the remot e part y answers t hat  it  can support mult iple codecs??Bound I nter face Nam eBound I nter face Nam eI f you select  LAN  or An y_ W AN , the VDSL Router  aut om atically act ivates t he VoI P service w hen any LAN or WAN connect ion is up.I f you select  M ult i_ W AN , you also need to select  the pre- configured WAN connect ions. The VoI P service is act ivat ed only when one of t he select ed WAN connect ions is up.Outbound ProxyOut bound Pr ox y AddressEnter t he I P address or dom ain nam e of the SI P outbound proxy server if your VoI P service provider has a SI P out bound server t o handle voice calls. This allows t he VDSL Router to work with any type of NAT rout er and elim inates t he need for STUN or a SI P ALG. Turn off any SI P ALG on a NAT router in front of t he VDSL Router to keep it  from  re- t ranslat ing the I P address ( since this is already handled by the out bound proxy server) . Out bound Pr ox y Por tEnt er  the SI P outbound proxy server’s list ening port , if your VoI P service provider gave you one. Ot herwise, keep t he default value.RTP Por t  RangeSt art PortEnd PortEnt er the list ening port number(s)  for RTP t raffic, if your VoI P service provider gave you this inform ation. Ot her wise, keep the default  values.To enter one port num ber, ent er the port num ber in t he St a rt Port  and End Por t  fields.To enter  a range of ports,• ent er t he port num ber at  the beginning of t he range in the St a rt Por t  field.• ent er t he port num ber at  the end of t he range in the End Port field.DTMF ModeTable 74   VoIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
 Chapter 15 VoiceBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 213DTMF Mode Control how the VDSL Router handles t he t ones t hat  your telephone m akes when you push its buttons. You should use t he sam e m ode your VoI P ser vice provider uses.RFC2 8 3 3  - send the DTMF tones in RTP packet s.I nBan d -  send the DTMF t ones in t he voice dat a st ream . This m et hod works best  when you are using a codec t hat  does not  use com pression ( like G.711) . Codecs that use compression ( like G.729 and G.726) can dist ort t he tones.SI PI nfo - send t he DTMF t ones in SI P m essages.Tr a n s p o r t  Ty p eTr a n s p o r t  Ty p e Select  t he transport layer  prot ocol ( TCP, UDP or TLS) used for SI P.AUTO is available w hen you select  t he Support Locat ing SI P Se rver opt ion. I f you select  AUTO here, the VDSL Router sends a DNS Name Aut hority Point er (NAPTR) query to locate t he SI P ser ver and get  t he support ed t ransport layer  prot ocol( s) .FAX Option This field cont rols how the VDSL Router handles fax m essages.G.711 Fax Passt hroughSelect  this if the VDSL Rout er should use G.711 t o send fax m essages. The peer  devices m ust  also use G.711.T.38 Fax Relay Select  this if t he VDSL Router should send fax m essages as UDP or TCP/I P packet s t hrough I P networks. This prov ides bet ter qualit y, but it m ay have inter- operability problem s. The peer devices m ust  also use T.38.QoS TagSI P DSCP Mark Sett ing Enter t he DSCP (DiffServ Code Point )  num ber  for SI P voice transm issions. The VDSL Rout er creat es Class of Service ( CoS)  priority tags wit h this num ber to voice t raffic that  it  transm its.RTP DSCP Mar k  Sett ingEnter t he DSCP (DiffServ Code Point )  num ber  for RTP voice transm issions. The VDSL Rout er creat es Class of Service ( CoS)  priority tags wit h this num ber to RTP traffic t hat  it  transm it s.Timer Set t ingExpirat ion DurationEnter t he num ber of seconds your SI P account is regist ered with t he SI P regist er server before it  is delet ed. The VDSL Rout er autom atically tries t o re-r egist er your SI P account when one- half of this tim e has passed. (The SI P regist er server m ight  have a different expirat ion.)Regist er  Re-send t imerEnter t he num ber of seconds t he VDSL Rout er waits before it t ries again to regist er the SI P account, if the first try failed or if there is no response.Session  Expires Ent er the num ber of seconds the VDSL Router let s a SI P session rem ain idle ( wit hout  traffic)  before it aut om at ically disconnect s t he session.Min-SE Enter t he m inim um  num ber of seconds the VDSL Rout er  let s a SI P session rem ain idle ( without  traffic)  before it autom at ically disconnects the session. When two SI P devices start  a SI P session, t hey m ust  agree on an expirat ion tim e for  idle sessions. This field is t he shortest  expirat ion t im e t hat  the VDSL Router  accept s.Phone Key ConfigTable 74   VoIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 15 VoiceBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide214Call Return Specify the key combinat ions t hat  you can ent er to place a call t o t he last  num ber t hat  called you.One Shot Caller  Display CallSpecify the key com binat ions t hat  you can enter to act ivate caller I D for the next  call only.One Shot Caller  Hidden CallSpecify the key com binat ions t hat  you can ent er t o deact ivat e caller I D for the next call only.One Shot Call Waiting Enable  Specify the key com binat ions that you can ent er to put  a call on hold when you are answering another.Call Waiting DisableSpecify the key com binations that you can ent er  to turn the call wait ing funct ion off.I nt ernal Call Specify the key com binat ions t hat  you can enter to call t he phone(s)  connect ed t o t he VDSL Rout er.Call Transfer Specify the key com binat ions t hat  you can ent er to transfer a call t o another phone.Unconditional Call Forward Enable   Specify the key com binat ions t hat  you can enter to forward all incom ing calls to the phone num ber you specified in t he SI P >  SI P Account  screen.Unconditional Call Forward DisableSpecify the key com binat ions t hat  you can ent er to turn the unconditional call forwar d funct ion off.No Answer Call For ward EnableSpecify the key com binat ions t hat  you can ent er to forward incoming calls to the phone num ber you specified in t he SI P >  SI P Account  screen if the calls are unanswered.No Answer Call Forward DisableSpecify the key com binat ions t hat  you can ent er to turn the no answer call forwar d funct ion off.Call Forward When Busy EnableSpecify the key com binat ions t hat  you can ent er to forward incoming calls to the phone num ber you specified in t he SI P >  SI P Account  screen if the phone port  is busy.Call Forward When Busy Disable Specify the key com binat ions t hat  you can ent er to turn the busy forward funct ion off.One Shot Call Waiting EnableSpecify the key com binat ions that  you can ent er to act ivate call wait ing on t he nex t call only.One Shot Call Waiting Disable Specify the key com binat ions t hat  you can ent er to deact ivat e call waiting on t he next  call only.Do Not Disturb EnableSpecify the key com binat ions that  you can ent er t o set your phone not  to ring when som eone calls you.Do Not Disturb DisableSpecify the key com binat ions t hat  you can ent er to turn this funct ion off.Call Com plet ion on Busy Subscriber ( CCBS)  Deact ivat eSpecify the key com binat ions that you can ent er to disable CCBS on a call.Table 74   VoIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
 Chapter 15 VoiceBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 21515.4.1  Dial Plan RulesA dial plan defines the dialing patterns, such as the length and range of t he digit s for a telephone num ber. I t also includes country codes, access codes, area codes, local num bers, long dist ance num bers or int ernat ional call prefixes. For exam ple, the dial plan ([ 2- 9] xxxxxx) does not allow a local num ber which begins wit h 1 or 0.Without a dial plan, users have to m anually ent er the whole callee’s num ber and wait  for t he specified dialing int erval t o tim e out or press a term inat or key (usually the pound key on the phone keypad) before t he VDSL Router m akes t he call.The VDSL Router init ializes a call when t he dialed num ber m at ches any one of t he rules in the dial plan. Dial plan rules follow these convent ions:• The collect ion of rules is in parent heses ( ) .• Rules are separat ed by the |  ( bar)  sym bol.Out going SI P Specify the key com binat ions that you can ent er to select the SI P account  that  you use t o make outgoing calls. I f you ent er # 12(by default) < SI P account index num ber> # < the phone num ber you want to call> , # 1201# 12345678 for exam ple, the VDSL Router uses t he first  SI P account t o call 12345678.Dial PlanDial Plan Enable  Select  this to act ivate the dial plan rules you specify in the t ext box provided. See Section 15.4.1 on page 215 for how to set  up a rule.Dialing I nt erval Select ionDialing I nt erval Select ionEnt er the num ber of seconds the VDSL Rout er should wait  aft er you st op dialing num bers before it m akes t he phone call. The value depends on how quickly you dial phone num bers.I f you select  I m m ediat e  Dial En able, you can press t he pound key ( # ) t o t ell t he VDSL Router to m ake t he phone call im m ediately, regardless of t his sett ing.I m m ediat e Dial EnableI m m ediat e Dial EnableSelect  this if you want  to use the pound key (# ) to tell t he VDSL Router to m ake t he phone call im m ediat ely, inst ead of waiting the num ber of seconds you selected in the Dia ling I nt er val Sele ct ion field.I f you select  t his, dial the phone num ber, and then press t he pound key. The VDSL Rout er m akes t he call im m ediately, inst ead of wait ing. You can still wait, if you want.Apply Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the VDSL Router.Cancel Click t his to set every field in this screen to it s last-saved value.Table 74   VoIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 15 VoiceBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide216• “ x” stands for a wildcard and can be any digit from  0 to 9.• A subset of keys is in a square bracket [ ] . Ranges are allowed.For exam ple, [ 359]  m eans a num ber m at ching this rule can be 3, 5 or 9. [ 26-8* ]  m eans a num ber m atching this rule can be 2, 6, 7, 8 or * .• The dot “ .”  appended t o a digit allows the digit  t o be ignored or repeat ed m ult iple tim es. Any digit  ( 0~ 9, * , # ) aft er the dot will be ignored.For exam ple, (01.) m eans a num ber m at ching this rule can be 0, 01, 0111, 01111, and so on.• < dialed- n um ber : t ran slat ed- num ber>  indicat es t he num ber after the colon replaces t he num ber before the colon in an angle bracket < > . For exam ple, (< : 1212>  xxxxxxx)  m eans t he VDSL Router aut om atically prefixes t he translated- num ber “ 1212”  to t he num ber you dialed before m aking the call. This can be used for local calls in the US.(< 9: >  xxx xxxxxxx) m eans t he VDSL Router autom at ically rem oves the specified prefix “9”  from t he num ber you dialed before m aking the call. This is always used for m aking out side calls from  an office. (xx< 123: 456> xxxx)  m eans t he VDSL Router aut om atically translates “ 123”  t o “ 456”  in the num ber you dialed before m aking t he call.• Calls wit h a num ber followed by the exclam at ion m ark “ !”  will be dropped.• Calls wit h a num ber followed by the t erm ination charact er “ @”  will be m ade im m ediat ely. Any digit  (0~ 9, * , # )  after the @ charact er will be ignored.I n this exam ple dial plan ( 0 |  [ 49] 11 |  1 [ 2- 9] xx xxxxxxx |  1 947 xxxxxxx ! ) , you can dial “ 0” t o call the local operator, call 411 or 911, or m ake a long distance call with an area code st arting from  2 to 9 in the US. The calls wit h t he area code 947 will be dropped.15.5  The Phone Region Screen Use t his screen to m aint ain settings t hat depend on which region of the world the VDSL Rout er is in. To access t his screen, click VoI P >  Phon e >  Region.Figure 90   VoIP > Phone > Region
 Chapter 15 VoiceBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 217Each field is described in t he following table.15.6  The Call Rule ScreenUse t his screen to add, edit , or rem ove speed-dial num bers for out going calls. Speed dial provides short cut s for dialing frequently- used ( VoI P) phone num bers. You also have to creat e speed- dial ent ries if you want to call SI P num bers that contain let t ers. Once you have configured a speed dial rule, you can use a short cut  Table 75   VoIP > Phone > RegionLABEL DESCRIPTIONRegion Set t ings Select the place in which the VDSL Router is located.Call Service ModeSelect  the m ode for supplem ent ary phone services (call hold, call waiting, call transfer and three- way conference calls)  that your VoI P service provider support s.Europe  Type - use supplem entary phone services in European m odeUSA Type  -  use supplem ent ary phone ser vices Am erican m odeYou m ight have to subscribe t o these services to use them. Contact your VoI P ser vice provider.Apply Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the VDSL Router.Cancel Click t his to set every field in this screen to it s last-saved value.
Chapter 15 VoiceBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide218(the speed dial num ber, # 01 for exam ple) on your phone's keypad t o call the phone num ber.Figure 91   VoIP > Call RuleEach field is described in t he following table.Table 76   VoIP > Call RuleLABEL DESCRIPTIONSpeed Dial Use t his sect ion to creat e or edit speed- dial ent ries.#Select  the speed- dial num ber you want  t o use for this phone num ber.Num ber Ent er the SI P num ber you want  the VDSL Rout er t o call when you dial the speed- dial num ber.Descript ion Enter  a nam e t o identify t he party you call when you dial the speed-dial num ber. You can use up t o 127 print able ASCI I  charact ers.Add Click this t o use t he inform at ion in t he Spee d Dia l sect ion to updat e the Phone Book sect ion.Phone Book Use this sect ion to look at  all the speed- dial ent ries and t o erase t hem .# This field displays t he speed- dial num ber you should dial to use t his ent ry.Num ber This field displays t he SI P number the VDSL Router calls when you dial the speed- dial num ber.Descript ion This field displays t he nam e of t he party you call when you dial the speed- dial num ber.
 Chapter 15 VoiceBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 21915.7  Call History Summary ScreenTh e VDSL Rou t er  log s calls fr om  or  t o you r SI P num ber s.  Th is scr een  allow s y ou t o view the sum m ary of received, dialed and m issed calls.Click V OI P >  Call History >  Sum m a r y. The following screen displays.Figure 92   VOIP > Call History > SummaryEach field is described in t he following table.15.8  Outgoing Calls ScreenUse t his screen t o see det ailed informat ion for each outgoing call you m ade.Modify Use t his field to edit or erase t he speed- dial ent ry.Click the Ed it  icon to copy the inform at ion for this speed- dial entry into the Spe ed Dial sect ion, where you can change it.Click the D e let e  icon t o erase t his speed- dial ent ry.Clear Click t his to erase all t he speed- dial ent ries.Table 76   VoIP > Call RuleLABEL DESCRIPTIONTable 77   VOIP > Call History > Call History SummaryLABEL DESCRIPTIONRef r esh Click this butt on t o renew the call hist ory list .Clear All Click this but ton to rem ove all ent ries from  the call hist ory list .No. This is a read- only index num ber.Date This is the date when t he calls were m ade.Total Calls This displays t he t otal num ber of calls from  or to your SI P num bers t hat  day.Outgoing Calls This displays how m any calls originated from  you t hat  day.I ncom ing Calls  This displays how m any calls you received that day.Missing Calls This displays how m any incom ing calls were not  answered that day.Total Duration This displays how long all calls last ed that  day.
Chapter 15 VoiceBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide220Click V OI P >  Call H ist ory >  Out going. The following screen displays.Figure 93   VOIP > Call History > OutgoingEach field is described in t he following table.15.9  Incoming Calls ScreenUse t his screen t o see det ailed inform ation for each incom ing call from  som eone calling you.Click V OI P >  Call H ist ory >  I ncom in g Calls. The following screen displays.Figure 94   VOIP > Call History > Incoming CallsEach field is described in t he following table.Table 78   VOIP > Call History > OutgoingLABEL DESCRIPTIONRef r esh Click this butt on t o renew the dialed call list .Clear All Click this button to rem ove all ent ries from  t he dialed call list .No. This is a read- only index num ber.t im e This is the dat e and tim e when the call was m ade.phone port This is the phone port  on which you m ade t he call.phone num ber This is the SI P num ber  you called.durat ion This displays how long t he call lasted.Table 79   VOIP > Call History > IncomingLABEL DESCRIPTIONRef r esh Click this butt on t o renew the received call list .Clear All Click this but ton to rem ove all ent ries from  the received call list .No. This is a read- only index num ber.t im e This is the dat e and tim e when the call was m ade.
 Chapter 15 VoiceBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 22115.10  Technical ReferenceThis sect ion contains background m at erial relevant to the VoI P screens.VoIP VoI P is t he sending of voice signals over I nt ernet  Prot ocol. This allow s you to m ake phone calls and send faxes over the I nternet  at a fract ion of t he cost  of using the t radit ional circuit- switched telephone net work. You can also use servers to run t elephone service applications like PBX services and voice m ail. I nt ernet Telephony Service Provider  ( I TSP)  com panies provide VoI P service. Circuit-sw itched t elephone net works require 64 kilobit s per second (Kbps)  in each direction t o handle a telephone call. VoI P can use advanced voice coding techniques wit h com pression t o reduce t he required bandwidth.  SIPThe Session I nit iat ion Protocol ( SI P) is an application-layer control (signaling)  protocol t hat handles t he set t ing up, altering and tearing down of voice and m ult im edia sessions over the I nternet.SI P signaling is separat e from  t he m edia for w hich it handles sessions. The m edia that is exchanged during t he session can use a different pat h from  that  of the signaling. SI P handles t elephone calls and can int erface wit h traditional circuit-switched t elephone net works.SIP IdentitiesA SI P account  uses an identit y (som et im es referred to as a SI P address) . A com plet e SI P ident ity is called a SI P URI ( Uniform  Resource I dentifier). A SI P account's URI  ident ifies t he SI P account  in a way sim ilar t o the way an e-m ail address ident ifies an e- m ail account . The form at of a SI P ident ity is SI P-Num ber@SI P- Service-Dom ain.phone port This is the phone port  on which you received t he call.Misse d m eans the call was unanswered.phone num ber This is the SI P num ber  that called you.durat ion This displays how long t he call lasted.Table 79   VOIP > Call History > IncomingLABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 15 VoiceBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide222SIP NumberThe SI P num ber is t he part of the SI P URI  t hat com es before the “ @”  sym bol. A SI P num ber can use letters like in an e- m ail address ( johndoe@your-I TSP.com  for exam ple)  or num bers like a t elephone num ber ( 1122334455@VoI P- provider.com  for exam ple) .SIP Service DomainThe SI P service dom ain of the VoI P service provider is t he dom ain nam e in a SI P URI . For exam ple, if the SI P address is 1122334455@VoI P-provider.com , then “ VoI P-provider.com ” is t he SI P service dom ain.SIP RegistrationEach VDSL Rou t er  is an in di v id u al SI P User  Agent  (UA) . To provide voice service, it  has a public I P address for SI P and RTP protocols to com m unicat e with ot her servers. A SI P user agent has to regist er with the SI P regist rar and m ust provide inform at ion about t he users it  represents, as well as its current I P address ( for the routing of incom ing SI P requests) . Aft er successful regist ration, the SI P server knows t hat  t he users (identified by their dedicated SI P URI s)  are represented by the UA, and knows the I P address t o which the SI P request s and responses should be sent.Regist ration is init iat ed by the User Agent Client (UAC) running in t he VoI P gat eway (the VDSL Router) . The gateway m ust  be configured wit h inform at ion letting it  know where t o send the REGI STER m essage, as well as t he relevant user and aut horization dat a. A SI P regist ration has a lim it ed lifespan. The User Agent Client m ust  renew its regist rat ion within t his lifespan. I f it  does not do so, the registration dat a will be deleted from  the SI P regist rar's dat abase and the connect ion broken.The VDSL Router att em pts t o regist er all enabled subscriber port s when it is switched on. When you enable a subscriber port t hat was previously disabled, t he VDSL Router at t em pt s t o regist er the port im m ediately.Authorization Requirements SI P registrations ( and subsequent  SI P request s)  require a usernam e and password for authorization. These credent ials are validated via a challenge /  response system  using t he HTTP digest  m echanism  (as det ailed in RFC3261, " SI P:  Session I nitiation Prot ocol" ) .
 Chapter 15 VoiceBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 223SIP ServersSI P is a client- server protocol. A SI P client is an application program  or device t hat sends SI P request s. A SI P server responds t o the SI P request s. When you use SI P t o m ake a VoI P call, it originates at a client and t erm inates at a server. A SI P client could be a com put er or a SI P phone. One device can act  as bot h a SI P client  and a SI P server. SIP User Agent A SI P user agent can m ake and receive VoI P t elephone calls. This m eans t hat SI P can be used for peer-to-peer com munications even t hough it is a client- server protocol. I n t he following figure, eit her A or B can act as a SI P user agent client to init iat e a call. A and B can also bot h act  as a SI P user agent t o receive t he call.Figure 95   SIP User AgentSIP Proxy ServerA SI P proxy server receives requests from  clients and forwards t hem  to another server.I n the following exam ple, you want  t o use client  device A to call som eone who is using client device C. 1The client  device ( A in t he figure)  sends a call invitat ion t o the SI P proxy server (B) .
Chapter 15 VoiceBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide2242The SI P proxy server forwards the call invitat ion to C.Figure 96   SIP Proxy ServerSIP Redirect ServerA SI P redirect server accept s SI P requests, t ranslat es the dest inat ion address to an I P address and sends t he translat ed I P address back to the device t hat sent the request. Then the client device that  originally sent the request  can send requests to the I P address that  it received back from  t he redirect  server. Redirect  servers do not  initiate SI P request s. I n the following exam ple, you want  t o use client  device A to call som eone who is using client device C. 1Client  device A sends a call invit ation for C to t he SI P redirect  server (B) .2The SI P redirect  server sends t he invit ation back to A with C’s I P addr ess ( or  dom ain nam e).
 Chapter 15 VoiceBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 2253Client  device A then sends the call invitat ion to client device C.Figure 97   SIP Redirect ServerSIP Register ServerA SI P regist er server m aintains a database of SI P identity-to-I P address ( or dom ain nam e) m apping. The regist er server  ch eck s y our  user  nam e and passw or d  when you register. RTPWhen you m ake a VoI P call using SI P, the RTP (Real tim e Transport  Prot ocol) is used t o handle voice dat a transfer. See RFC 1889 for det ails on RTP.Pulse Code ModulationPulse Code Modulation (PCM)  m easures analog signal am plitudes at  regular tim e intervals and converts t hem  int o bit s.
Chapter 15 VoiceBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide226SIP Call ProgressionThe following figure displays t he basic steps in the set up and tear down of a SI P call. A calls B. 1 A sends a SI P I NVI TE request to B. This m essage is an invit ation for B to participat e in a SI P telephone call. 2 B sends a response indicating t hat the t elephone is ringing.3 B sends an OK response after the call is answered. 4 A then sends an ACK m essage to acknowledge t hat B has answered t he call. 5Now A and B exchange voice m edia ( t alk) . 6Aft er t alking, A hangs up and sends a BYE request . 7 B replies wit h an OK response confirm ing receipt of the BYE request  and the call is ter m inated.SIP Call Progression Through Proxy ServersUsually, the SI P UAC sets up a phone call by sending a request  t o the SI P proxy server. Then, t he proxy server looks up t he destinat ion t o which t he call should be forwarded ( according to t he URI  request ed by the SI P UAC). The request  m ay be forwarded t o m ore t han one proxy server before arriving at it s dest inat ion. The response to t he request  goes to all the proxy servers t hrough which t he request passed, in reverse sequence. Once the session is set up, session traffic is sent between the UAs directly, bypassing all the proxy servers in bet ween.Table 80   SIP Call ProgressionA B1. I NVI TE2. Ringing3. OK4. ACK 5.Dialogue ( voice traffic)6. BYE7. OK
 Chapter 15 VoiceBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 227The following figure shows t he SI P and session t raffic flow between the user agents ( UA 1  and UA 2 ) and the proxy servers ( t his exam ple shows t wo proxy servers, PROXY 1  and PROX Y 2 ) .Figure 98   SIP Call Through Proxy ServersThe following table shows t he SI P call progression.1User  Agent 1  sends a SI P I NVI TE request to Pr ox y 1 . This m essage is an invitat ion to Use r Agent  2  to participate in a SI P telephone call. Proxy 1  sends a response indicating t hat it  is t rying to com plet e the request .Table 81   SIP Call ProgressionUA 1 PROXY 1 PROXY 2 UA 2I nvit eI nvit e100 Trying I nvite100 Trying180 Ringing180 Ringing180 Ringing200 OK200 OK200 OKACKRTP RTPBYE200 OKUA 1 UA 2PROXY 1 PROXY 2 SIPSIPSIPSIP & RTP
Chapter 15 VoiceBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide2282Proxy 1  sends a SI P I NVI TE request  t o Proxy 2 . Proxy 2  sends a response indicating t hat it is t rying t o com plet e t he request.3Proxy 2  sends a SI P I NVI TE request  t o User Agent  2 .4User  Agent 2  sends a response back to Prox y 2  indicating that the phone is ringing. The response is relayed back t o User  Agent 1  via Proxy 1 .5User  Agent  2  sends an OK response to Proxy 2  after the call is answered. This is also relayed back to Use r  Agent  1  via Proxy 1 .6User  Agent 1  and User Agent  2  exchange RTP packets containing voice data directly, without involving the proxies.7When User Agent  2  hangs up, he sends a BYE request . 8User  Agent 1  replies with an OK response confirm ing receipt of t he BYE request, and the call is t erm inat ed.Voice CodingA codec ( coder/ decoder)  codes analog voice signals into digit al signals and decodes t he digital signals back into analog voice signals. The VDSL Router support s the following codecs.• G.711 is a Pulse Code Modulation ( PCM)  waveform  codec. PCM m easur es analog signal am plitudes at  regular tim e intervals and converts t hem  into digit al sam ples. G.711 provides very good sound quality but  requires 64 kbps of bandwidt h.• G.726 is an Adaptive Different ial PCM ( ADPCM) waveform  codec that uses a lower bitrate than st andard PCM conversion. ADPCM converts analog audio into digital signals based on the difference bet ween each audio sam ple and a predict ion based on previous sam ples. The m ore sim ilar t he audio sam ple is t o the predict ion, the less space needed t o describe it . G.726 operates at 16, 24, 32 or 40 kbps. • G.729 is an Analysis- by- Synthesis ( AbS)  hybrid waveform  codec t hat uses a filter based on inform at ion about  how the hum an vocal t ract  produces sounds. G.729 provides good sound quality and reduces t he required bandwidth to 8 kbps.Voice Activity Detection/Silence SuppressionVoice Act ivit y Det ect ion ( VAD) det ect s whet her or not  speech is present. This lets the VDSL Rout er reduce t he bandwidth that a call uses by not  t ransm it t ing “ silent packets”  w hen you are not speaking.
 Chapter 15 VoiceBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 229Comfort Noise GenerationWhen using VAD, the VDSL Rout er generat es com fort  noise when the other party is not speaking. The com fort noise lets you know that the line is st ill connect ed as total silence could easily be m ist aken for a lost  connection.Echo Cancellation G.168 is an I TU-T standard for elim inating t he echo caused by the sound of your voice reverberat ing in the t elephone receiver while you talk.MWI (Message Waiting Indication)Enable Message Waiting I ndication ( MWI )  enables your phone t o give you a m essage–wait ing (beeping)  dial tone when you have a voice m essage( s) . Your VoI P service provider m ust  have a m essaging system  that  sends m essage waiting st atus SI P packets as defined in RFC 3842.Custom Tones (IVR)I VR ( I nteractive Voice Response) is a feat ure t hat  allows you t o use your telephone to int eract  with t he VDSL Router. The VDSL Router allows you to record custom  t ones for the Early M edia  and Music On  Hold funct ions. The sam e recordings apply t o bot h the caller ringing and on hold tones. Recording Custom TonesUse t he following steps if you would like to creat e new tones or change your tones:  1Pick up the phone and press “ * * * * ” on your phone’s keypad and wait for the m essage that  says you are in the configuration m enu. 2Press a num ber from  1101~ 1105 on your phone followed by the “ # ”  key.3Play your desired m usic or voice recording int o the receiver’s m outhpiece. Press the “# ” key.Table 82   Custom Tones DetailsLABEL DESCRIPTIONTotal Time for All Tones 900 seconds for all cust om  tones combinedMaxim um  Tim e per I ndividual Tone 180 secondsTo t a l  N u m b e r  o f  To n e s  Recor dable5You can record up to 5 different custom  t ones but t he t ot al tim e m ust  be 900 seconds or less.
Chapter 15 VoiceBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide2304You can continue t o add, list en to, or delet e tones, or you can hang up the receiver when you are done.Listening to Custom TonesDo t he following to listen t o a custom  t one:1Pick up the phone and press “ * * * * ” on your phone’s keypad and wait for the m essage that  says you are in the configuration m enu.2Press a num ber from  1201~ 1208 followed by t he “# ” key to list en to t he tone.3You can continue t o add, list en to, or delet e tones, or you can hang up the receiver when you are done.Deleting Custom TonesDo t he following to delete a custom  t one:1Pick up the phone and press “ * * * * ” on your phone’s keypad and wait for the m essage that  says you are in the configuration m enu.2Press a num ber from  1301~ 1308 followed by t he “# ” key to delet e the t one of your choice. Press 14 followed by the “ # ”  key if you wish t o clear all your custom  tones.You can continue t o add, list en to, or delet e tones, or you can hang up the receiver when you are done.15.10.1  Quality of Service (QoS)Quality of Service ( QoS)  refers t o both a netw ork's abilit y to deliver dat a with m inim um  delay, and the networking m ethods used t o provide bandwidt h for real-tim e m ult im edia applications. Type of Service (ToS)Net work traffic can be classified by setting t he ToS ( Type of Service)  values at  t he dat a source ( for exam ple, at  t he VDSL Rout er)  so a server can decide the best  m et hod of delivery, that is t he least  cost , fast est  rout e and so on. DiffServDiffServ is a class of service ( CoS)  m odel t hat m arks packets so that  they receive specific per-hop t reatm ent at  DiffServ-com pliant  network devices along the rout e based on t he application t ypes and t raffic flow. Packet s are m arked wit h DiffServ
 Chapter 15 VoiceBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 231Code Points ( DSCP)  indicat ing the level of service desired. This allows the interm ediary DiffServ- com pliant network devices t o handle the packets differently depending on the code point s wit hout  t he need to negot iat e pat hs or rem em ber st ate inform ation for every flow. I n addit ion, applications do not  have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the t raffic is going.3DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new DS ( Differentiated Services)  field to replace the Type of Service ( TOS)  field in the I P header. The DS field cont ains a 2-bit unused field and a 6-bit  DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels. The following figure illust rates the DS field. DSCP is backward com patible with the three precedence bit s in t he ToS oct et so that non-DiffServ com pliant , ToS- enabled netw ork device will not conflict  with the DSCP m apping.  Figure 99   DiffServ: Differentiated Service FieldThe DSCP value determ ines t he for warding behavior, the PHB (Per-Hop Behavior), that  each packet  get s across the DiffServ net work. Based on t he m arking rule, different kinds of traffic can be m arked for different  priorities of forwarding. Resources can then be allocat ed according to t he DSCP values and the configured policies.15.10.2  Phone Services OverviewSupplem entary services such as call hold, call wait ing, and call transfer. are generally available from  your VoI P service provider. The VDSL Router supports t he following services:• Call Hold• Call Waiting• Making a Second Call• Call Transfer• Call Forwarding • Three-Way Conference• Internal Calls3. The VDSL Router does not support DiffServ at the time of writing.DSCP( 6- bit )Unused(2-bit)
Chapter 15 VoiceBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide232• Call Park and Pickup• Do not DisturbNote: To take full advantage of the supplementary phone services available through the VDSL Router's phone ports, you may need to subscribe to the services from your VoIP service provider.15.10.2.1  The Flash KeyFlashing m eans t o press t he hook for a short period of tim e ( a few hundred m illiseconds)  before releasing it . On newer telephones, t here should be a "flash" key (but t on) that generates t he signal elect ronically. I f the flash key is not available, you can tap ( press and im m ediately release) the hook by hand t o achieve t he sam e effect . However, using the flash key is preferred since the t im ing is m uch m ore precise. With m anual t apping, if the duration is too long, it m ay be interpret ed as hanging up by the VDSL Rout er.You can invoke all t he supplem entary services by using the flash key. 15.10.2.2  Europe Type Supplementary Phone ServicesThis sect ion describes how to use supplem entary phone services wit h the Eu rope  Type Ca ll Service  M ode. Com mands for supplem entary services are listed in the table below.Aft er pressing t he flash key, if you do not  issue t he sub- com m and before the default  sub- com m and tim eout  ( 2 seconds)  expires or issue an invalid sub-com mand, the current operat ion w ill be aborted.Table 83   European Flash Key CommandsCOMMAND SUB-COMMAND DESCRIPTIONFlash  Put a curr ent  call on hold t o place a second call.Switch back to the call ( if there is no second call).Flash 0 Drop the call present ly on hold or rej ect an incoming call which is waiting for answer.Flash 1 Disconnect  the current  phone connect ion and answer the incom ing call or resum e wit h caller  presently on hold.Flash 2 1. Swit ch back and forth between t wo calls.2. Put  a current  call on hold t o answer an incoming call.3. Separat e t he current  three- way conference call into two individual calls (one is on- line, t he other is on hold).Flash 3 Create t hree-way conference connect ion.Flash  * 98# Transfer the call t o another phone.
 Chapter 15 VoiceBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 233European Call HoldCall hold allows you to put a call ( A)  on hold by pressing t he flash key. I f you have anot her call, press the flash key and t hen “2”  t o swit ch back and forth bet ween caller A and B by putting eit her one on hold.Press the flash key and then “ 0” t o disconnect t he call presently on hold and keep the current call on line.Press the flash key and then “ 1” to disconnect  t he current call and resum e t he call on hold.I f you hang up t he phone but  a caller is still on hold, there will be a rem ind ring.European Call Waiting This allows you t o place a call on hold while you answer anot her incom ing call on the sam e telephone (direct ory)  num ber. I f there is a second call to a t elephone num ber, you will hear a call wait ing tone. Take one of t he follow ing act ions.• Reject t he second call.Press the flash key and then press “ 0”.• Disconnect  t he first  call and answer the second call.Either press the flash key and press “ 1”, or j ust  hang up the phone and t hen answer the phone after it  rings.• Put the first  call on hold and answer the second call.Press t he flash key and then “ 2”.European Call TransferDo t he following to transfer an incom ing call (that you have answered) to another phone.1Press the flash key to put the caller on hold.2When you hear t he dial tone, dial “ * 98# ” followed by the num ber to which you want to transfer t he call.3Aft er you hear t he ring signal or the second party answers it, hang up the phone.European Three-Way ConferenceUse t he following steps t o m ake three-way conference calls.
Chapter 15 VoiceBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide2341When you are on the phone talking to som eone, press the flash key to put  t he caller on hold and get  a dial tone. 2Dial a phone num ber directly t o m ake another call.3When the second call is answered, press t he flash key and press “ 3” t o create a three- way conversation.4Hang up the phone t o drop the connect ion.5I f you want  to separat e the act ivat ed three-way conference into t w o individual connections ( one is on-line, the ot her is on hold) , press t he flash key and press “ 2”.15.10.2.3  USA Type Supplementary ServicesThis sect ion describes how t o use supplem ent ary phone services wit h the USA Type Ca ll Service  M ode. Com mands for supplem entary services are listed in the table below.Aft er pressing t he flash key, if you do not  issue t he sub- com m and before the default  sub- com m and tim eout  ( 2 seconds)  expires or issue an invalid sub-com mand, the current operat ion w ill be aborted.USA Call HoldCall hold allows you to put a call ( A)  on hold by pressing t he flash key. I f you have another call, press the flash key to swit ch back and forth bet ween caller A and B by put t ing eit her one on hold.I f you hang up t he phone but  a caller is still on hold, there will be a rem ind ring.USA Call Waiting This allows you t o place a call on hold while you answer anot her incom ing call on the sam e telephone (direct ory)  num ber. Table 84   USA Flash Key CommandsCOMMAND SUB-COMMAND DESCRIPTIONFlash  Put  a current call on hold t o place a second call. After the second call is successful, press t he flash key again to have a three-way conference call.Put a curr ent  call on hold t o answer an incom ing call.Flash  * 98# Transfer the call t o another phone.
 Chapter 15 VoiceBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 235I f t here is a second call to your t elephone num ber, you will hear a call waiting tone. Press the flash key to put the first  call on hold and answer the second call.USA Call TransferDo t he following to transfer an incom ing call (that you have answered) to another phone.1Press the flash key to put the caller on hold.2When you hear t he dial tone, dial “ * 98# ” followed by the num ber to which you want to transfer t he call.3Aft er you hear t he ring signal or the second party answers it, hang up the phone.USA Three-Way ConferenceUse t he following steps t o m ake three-way conference calls.1When you are on the phone talking to som eone ( part y A) , press t he flash key to put t he caller on hold and get a dial t one. 2Dial a phone num ber directly t o m ake anot her call (to part y B) .3When part y B answers t he second call, press t he flash key t o creat e a t hree-way conversation.4Hang up the phone t o drop the connect ion.5I f you want  to separat e the act ivat ed three-way conference into t w o individual connections ( with party A on- line and party B on hold) , press t he flash key.  6I f you want  t o go back to t he three-way conversation, press the flash key again.7I f you want  to separat e the act ivat ed three-way conference into t w o individual connections again, press the flash key. This t im e the party B is on-line and party A is on hold.
Chapter 15 VoiceBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide23615.10.2.4  Phone Functions SummaryThe following table shows t he key com binat ions you can ent er on your phone’s keypad to use certain features. Table 85   Phone Functions SummaryACTION FUNCTION DESCRIPTION* 98#   Call t ransfer Transfer a call t o anot her phone. See Sect ion 15.10.2.2 on page 232 (Europe t ype)  and Sect ion 15.10.2.3 on page 234 (USA type) .* 66# Call return Place a call t o t he last person who called you. * 95# Enable Do Not Dist urb Use t hese t o set  your phone not  to ring when som eone calls you, or to t urn this funct ion off. # 95# Disable Do Not Dist urb* 41# Enable Call Waiting  Use t hese t o allow you to put  a call on hold when you are answering anot her, or t o t urn t his funct ion off. # 41# Disable Call Waiting* * * * I VR Use t hese t o set  up I nt eractive Voice Response ( I VR). I VR allows you t o record cust om  caller ringing tones ( t he sound a caller hears before you pick up the phone)  and on hold tones (the sound som eone hear s when you put  t heir call on hold) .# # # # I nt ernal Call Call the phone(s)  connect ed t o t he VDSL Router.* 82 One Shot  Caller Display CallAct ivate or deact ivate caller I D for the next call only.* 67 One Shot  Caller Hidden Call
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 237CHAPTER   16Diagnostic16.1  OverviewThe D ia gnost ic screens display inform at ion to help you ident ify problem s with t he VDSL Router.The route bet ween a CO VDSL sw it ch and one of it s CPE m ay go t hrough swit ches owned by independent  or ganizations. A connect ivit y fault point generally takes t im e t o discover and im pact s subscriber ’s net work access. I n order t o elim inat e t he m anagem ent  and m aintenance efforts, I EEE 802.1ag is a Connect ivit y Fault Managem ent  ( CFM)  specificat ion which allows network adm inist rat ors t o identify and m anage connect ion fault s. Through discovery and verificat ion of t he pat h, CFM can det ect , analyze and isolate connect ivit y faults in bridged LANs.16.1.1  What You Can Do in this Chapter• The D ia gn ost ics screen lets you test the VDSL Rout er’s connect ions ( Section 16.3 on page 238) .• The Fa ult  Man agem ent  screen let s you perform  CFM actions ( Section 16.4 on page 238) .16.2  What You Need to KnowThe following t erm s and concept s m ay help as you read t hrough this chapt er.How CFM Works A Maintenance Associat ion ( MA)  defines a VLAN and associat ed Maintenance End Point ( MEP) ports on t he device under a Maintenance Dom ain (MD) level. An MEP port  has t he ability t o send Connect ivity Check Messages ( CCMs)  and get  ot her  MEP ports inform ation from  neighbor devices’ CCMs wit hin an MA. CFM provides t wo tests t o discover connectivity faults. • Loopback t est  - checks if t he MEP port  receives its Loop Back Response ( LBR) from  its tar get  aft er it sends t he Loop Back Message (LBM) . I f no response is received, there m ight  be a connect ivit y fault bet ween t hem . • Link trace t est  - provides addit ional connect ivit y fault analysis to get m ore inform ation on where the fault is. I f an MEP port does not respond t o t he source MEP, this m ay indicate a fault . Adm inistrat ors can take furt her act ion to check and resum e services from  the fault  according to the line connect ivit y stat us report .
Chapter 16 DiagnosticBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide23816.3  Diagnostics     Click D ia gn ost ics t o open the screen shown next. Use t his screen t o t est the VDSL Router’s connect ions. Figure 100   Diagnost ics• Click Nex t  Connect ion t o t est  t he next  WAN connection.• Click Test  t o perform  the t est  again.• Click Test  W it h OAM  F4  wit h t o perform  an OAM ( Operation, Adm inist rat ion and Maintenance)  F4 loopback t est  on an ATM PVC. Note:  The DSLAM t o which t he VDSL Router is connect ed m ust  also support OAM F4 to use t he OAM F4 loopback test.16.4  802.1ag Connectivity Fault ManagementClick Diagnostics >  Fault  Ma na gem e nt  t o open the following screen. Use this screen t o perform  CFM act ions.
 Chapter 16 DiagnosticBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 239Figure 101   802.1ag Connect ivit y Fault  Managem ent  The following t able describes t he fields in this screen. Table 86   802.1ag Connect ivit y Fault ManagementLABEL DESCRIPTION802.1ag Connect ivity Fault Managem ent  Maint enance Domain (MD)  LevelSelect a level (0- 7)  under which you want t o create an MA.Dest inat ion MAC AddressEnter t he t arget  device’s MAC address to which t he VDSL Rout er perfor m s a CFM loopback test .802.1Q VLAN I DTy pe a VLAN I D (0- 4095)  for t his MA.VDSL Traffic Ty p eThis shows whether t he VDSL traffic is act ivated.Loopback Message (LBM)This shows how m any Loop Back Messages (LBMs)  are sent  and if t here is any inorder or out order Loop Back Response ( LBR) received from  a rem ot e MEP.Linktrace Message (LTM)This show s t he dest inat ion MAC address in t he Link  Trace Response ( LTR).Set  MD Level Click this but ton to configure the MD (Maint enance Dom ain)  level.Send Loopback Click this but ton to have the select ed MEP send t he LBM (Loop Back  Message) t o a specified rem ote end point.Send Linkt race Click this but ton to have the selected MEP send t he LTMs (Link  Trace Messages)  t o a specified rem ot e end point .
Chapter 16 DiagnosticBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide240
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 241CHAPTER   17SettingsThis chapt er describes how  to m anage your  VDSL Router’s configuration.17.1  Backup Configuration Using the Web ConfiguratorClick Man agem ent >  Settings >  Back u p to open the following screen. Use t his screen to back up ( save)  t he VDSL Router’s current  configurat ion to a file on your com put er. Once your VDSL Router is configured and functioning pr operly, it is highly recomm ended that you back up your configuration file before m aking configuration changes. The backup configurat ion file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous sett ings. Figure 102   Sett ings:  BackupClick Back up Se t t ings to save t he VDSL Rout er’s current  configuration t o your com puter.17.2  Restore Configuration Using the Web ConfiguratorClick Managem e nt  >  Se t t ings >  Upda t e  to open t he following screen. Use t his screen t o upload a new or previously saved configuration file from  your computer to your VDSL Router. Figure 103   Sett ings:  Updat e
Chapter 17 SettingsBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide242Do not turn off the VDSL Router while configuration file upload is in progressYou m ust  then wait  before logging int o t he VDSL Router again. The VDSL Rout er autom atically rest ar ts causing a t emporary net work disconnect. I n som e operating syst em s, you m ay see t he follow ing icon on your desktop.Figure 104   Temporarily Disconnect edYou m ay need to change t he I P address of your com puter t o be in the sam e subnet  as that of the VDSL Router’s I P address ( 192.168.1.1) . See t he appendix for det ails on how to set up your com puter ’s I P address.17.3  Restoring Factory DefaultsClick Managem ent  >  Settin gs >  Rest ore Default t o open t he following screen. Figure 105   Managem ent  >  Set t ings >  Rest ore DefaultClick Re st or e D efau lt Set t ings to clear all user-entered configurat ion inform ation and ret urn t he VDSL Router to its fact ory defaults. You can also press t he RESET butt on on the rear panel t o reset t he fact ory defaults of your VDSL Rou t er .Table 87   Set t ings:  Updat eLABEL DESCRIPTIONSet tings File Nam eTy pe in the locat ion of the file you want  to upload in t his field or  click Brow se... to find it .Br owse...  Click Br ow se ... to find the file you want to upload. Rem em ber that  you m ust decom press com pressed (.ZI P) files before you can upload t hem . Update Set tingsClick this to begin the upload process.
 Chapter 17 SettingsBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 243You m ay need to change t he I P address of your com puter t o be in the sam e subnet  as that of the default VDSL Router I P address ( 192.168.1.1) . See the appendix for det ails on how t o set  up your com puter ’s I P address.
Chapter 17 SettingsBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide244
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 245CHAPTER   18Log18.1  OverviewThe web configurat or allow s you to choose which categories of event s and/ or alerts t o have t he VDSL Router log and then display the logs or have t he VDSL Router send t hem  to an adm inist rat or ( as e- m ail) or t o a syslog server. 18.1.1  What You Can Do in this Chapter• Use the System  Log screen t o see the syst em  logs ( Sect ion 18.2 on page 246) .• Use the Syst em  Log Configura t ion screen t o see t he security-relat ed logs for the cat egories that  you select  (Sect ion 18.3 on page 246) .18.1.2  What You Need To KnowThe following t erm s and concept s m ay help as you r ead t his chapter.Alerts and LogsAn alert  is a t ype of log that warrants m ore serious att ent ion. They include syst em  errors, att acks ( access control) and at tem pt ed access to blocked web sites. Som e categories such as Syst em  Er rors consist of bot h logs and alerts. You m ay different iat e them  by their  color in the V iew  Log screen. Alerts display in red and logs display in black.Syslog Overview The syslog pr ot ocol allows devices to send event  not ification m essages across an I P network to syslog servers t hat  collect  t he event m essages. A syslog-enabled device can generat e a syslog m essage and send it t o a syslog server.Syslog is defined in RFC 3164. The RFC defines the packet form at , cont ent  and syst em  log relat ed inform ation of syslog m essages. Each syslog m essage has a facility and severit y level. The syslog facilit y identifies a file in the syslog server. Refer t o the docum ent ation of your syslog program  for details. The following t able describes the syslog severit y levels. Table 88   Syslog Severit y LevelsCODE SEVERITY0 Em ergency:  The syst em  is unusable.1 Aler t :  Act ion m ust  be t aken im m ediately.2 Crit ical:  The sy st em  condit ion is critical.3 Error :  There is an error condit ion on t he syst em .4 Warning:  There is a warning condition on the syst em .
Chapter 18 LogBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide24618.2  The System Log Screen Use t he Syst e m  Log screen t o see t he syst em  logs. Click M anagem ent  >  Syst e m  Log >  View  Syst e m  Log t o open t he Syst e m  Log screen. Figure 106   Sy st em  LogThe following t able describes t he fields in t his screen.   18.3  The System Log Configuration ScreenTo change your VDSL Router’s log set t ings, click M a na ge m ent >  Syst e m  Log >  Configur e Syst e m  Log. The screen appears as shown.5 Not ice:  There is a nor m al but significant  condition on the syst em .6 I nform ational:  The syslog cont ains an inform at ional m essage.7 Debug:  The m essage is intended for debug- level purposes.Table 88   Syslog Severit y LevelsCODE SEVERITYTable 89   System  LogLABEL DESCRIPTIONDat e/ Tim e  This field displays when the log was recorded. Facility  The log facility allows you t o send logs t o different  files in the syslog server. Refer to the docum entation of your syslog program  for m ore det ails.Sever ity This field displays t he severit y level of the logs t hat  the device is to send t o this syslog server.Messages This field st at es the reason for the log.Refresh Click this t o renew  t he log scr een. Close Click this to close the log screen.
 Chapter 18 LogBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 247Figure 107   Syst em  Log ConfigurationThe following t able describes t he fields in this screen. Table 90   Syst em  Log Configurat ionLABEL DESCRIPTIONLog Select  Enable t o have t he VDSL Router log event s.Log Level Select  t he severity level of events to log.Display  Level Select t he sever it y level of events to display in the log.Mode Select  the syslog destinat ion from  the dr op-down list  box. Select  Re m o t e, t he log( s)  t o send logs on ly t o a r em ot e sy slog serv er.  Select  Local to save t he logs in a local file. To send the log( s)  to a rem ote syslog server  and sav e it in a local file, select Bot h .Ser ver I P AddressEnter  t he I P address of t he syslog server  t hat will log the select ed cat egories of logs. Ser ver UDP PortEnter  t he port  num ber used by the syslog server.Apply/ Save Click t his butt on to save your changes.
Chapter 18 LogBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide248
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 249CHAPTER   19TR-069 Client19.1  OverviewThis chapt er explains how to configur e the VDSL Rout er’s TR- 069 aut o-configuration settings.19.2  The TR-069 Client ScreenTR-069 defines how Cust omer Prem ise Equipm ent  ( CPE), for exam ple your VDSL Router , can be m anaged over t he WAN by an Auto Configurat ion Server (ACS) . TR- 069 is based on sending Remot e Procedure Calls ( RPCs)  bet ween an ACS and a client  device. RPCs are sent in Ext ensible Mar kup Language (XML)  form at  over HTTP or HTTPS. An adm inist rat or can use an ACS to rem ot ely set  up t he VDSL Router, m odify set t ings, perform  firm ware upgrades as well as m onitor and diagnose t he VDSL Router. You have t o enable t he device to be m anaged by the ACS and specify the ACS I P address or dom ain name and usernam e and password.Click Managem ent  >  TR- 0 6 9  Clie nt  t o open the following screen. Use t his screen to configure your VDSL Router to be m anaged by an ACS.
Chapter 19 TR-069 ClientBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide250Figure 108   TR- 069 Client The following t able describes t he fields in this screen. Table 91   TR- 069 ClientLABEL DESCRIPTIONI nfor m Select En able for  t he VDSL Rout er to send periodic inform  via TR- 069 on the WAN. Ot herwise, select  Disa ble .I nfor m  I nt er val Ent er t he t im e int erval ( in seconds)  at  which the VDSL Router sends inform at ion t o the aut o-configurat ion server.ACS URL Enter t he URL or I P address of the aut o- configurat ion serv er.ACS User Nam e Enter t he TR- 069 user nam e for aut hent ication with the aut o- configurat ion server.ACS Passw or d Ent er the TR- 069 password for  aut hent icat ion wit h the aut o-configurat ion server.WAN I nterface used by  TR- 069 clientSelect  a WAN int er face t hr ough which the TR- 069 traffic passes.I f y ou select  Any_ W AN , you should also select t he pre- configured WAN connection(s) .Display SOAP m essages on serial consoleSelect  Ena ble  t o show t he SOAP m essages on the console.Connection Requ est  Au t hent icationSelect  t his option to enable aut henticat ion w hen t here is a connect ion request  fr om  the ACS.Connection Request  User Nam eEnter the connect ion request user nam e.When the ACS m akes a connection request to the VDSL Rout er, this user nam e is used to authenticat e the ACS.Connection Requ est  PasswordEnter t he connect ion request  passw ord.When the ACS m akes a connection request to the VDSL Rout er, this passwor d is used t o authenticat e the ACS.
 Chapter 19 TR-069 ClientBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 251Connection Requ est  URLThis shows the connect ion request  URL.The ACS can use this URL t o m ake a connect ion request  to t he VDSL Router.Apply/ Save Click t his but ton to save your changes.Table 91   TR- 069 Client ( cont inued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 19 TR-069 ClientBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide252
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 253CHAPTER   20Internet Time20.1  The Internet  Time Screen Click Man agem e nt  >  I n t er net  Tim e t o configure t he VDSL Router to get  t he tim e from  tim e servers on t he I nt ernet. Figure 109   I nt ernet Tim eThe following t able describes t he fields in this screen. Table 92   I nternet Tim eLABEL DESCRIPTIONAutom at ically sy nchronize wit h I nternet  tim e servers Select  t his t o have t he VDSL Rout er get t he tim e from  t he specified I nt ernet  tim e serv ers.Fir st  ~  Fifth NTP tim e server Select  an NTP t im e ser ver from  the drop-down list box. Ot herwise, select  Ot h e r  and ent er  t he I P address or URL (up t o 29 extended ASCI I  charact ers in length)  of your t im e server. Select  N o ne if you don’t want  t o configure the tim e server.Check with your  I SP/ network adm inist rator if you are unsure of this inform at ion.Tim e zone offset Choose t he t im e zone of your location. This will set t he t im e difference betw een your t im e zone and Greenwich Mean Tim e ( GMT) . Apply/ Save Click t his but ton to save your changes.
Chapter 20 Internet TimeBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide254
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 255CHAPTER   21Access Control21.1  Overview Change t he login password in t he Access Cont r ol screen. 21.2  The Access Control ScreenClick Managem ent  >  Acce ss Cont r ol t o open the following screen.Figure 110   Access ControlThe following t able describes t he labels in t his screen. Table 93   Access Cont rolLABEL DESCRIPTIONUser Nam e This field displays the nam e of the account t hat  you used to log in the syst em . Old Passw or d Type t he default password or  t he exist ing password you use to access the syst em  in this field.New Password Type your new syst em  password (up to 30 charact ers) . Note that  as you type a password, the screen displays a (* ) for each charact er you type. After you change the passwor d, use the new password to access the VDSL Rout er.Ret y pe t o confir mTy pe t he new password again for  confirm at ion.Apply/ Save Click this but ton t o save your changes.
Chapter 21 Access ControlBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide256
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 257CHAPTER   22Software Upgrade22.1  OverviewThis chapt er explains how to upload new software to your VDSL Rout er. You can download new software releases from your nearest  ZyXEL FTP sit e ( or www.zyxel.com )  to use to upgrade your device’s perform ance.Only use software for your device’s specific model. Refer to the label on the bottom of your VDSL Router.22.2  The Update Software ScreenClick Managem ent  >  Upda t e Softw a re  to open t he following screen. The upload process uses HTTP (Hyper text  Transfer  Prot ocol)  and m ay take up to two m inutes. After a successful upload, t he syst em  will reboot . Do NOT turn off the VDSL Router while software upload is in progress!Figure 111   Updat e SoftwareThe following t able describes t he labels in t his screen. Table 94   Update Soft wareLABEL DESCRIPTIONSoft ware File Nam e Type in t he location of the file you want  t o upload in t his field or click Brow se  ... to find it.Br owse...  Click this to find the .bin file you want t o upload. Rem em ber that  you m ust decom press com pressed (.zip)  files before you can upload t hem . Update SoftwareClick this to begin the upload process. This process m ay  t ake up to t wo m inut es.
Chapter 22 Software UpgradeBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide258Aft er you see t he soft ware updat ing screen, wait  tw o m inutes before logging int o t he VDSL Rout er again. The VDSL Router autom atically rest ar ts in t his tim e causing a t em porary netw ork disconnect . I n som e operat ing syst em s, you m ay see t he following icon on your desktop.Figure 112   Network Tem porarily Disconnect edAft er two m inutes, log in again and check your new soft ware version in t he D e vice  I nfo screen.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 259CHAPTER   23Reboot23.1  Restart Using the Web ConfiguratorClick Man agem e nt  >  Re boot  t o open t he following screen. Use t his screen t o rest art the . Figure 113   Reboot
Chapter 23 RebootBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide260
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 261CHAPTER   24TroubleshootingThis chapt er offers som e suggest ions t o solve problem s you m ight  encounter. The pot ent ial problem s are divided into t he following categories. •Power, Hardware Connect ions, and LEDs•VDSL Rout er  Access and Login•I nt ernet  Access•Wireless I nt ernet  Access•USB Device Connect ion•UPnP24.1  Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDsThe VDSL Rout er does not  t urn on. None of t he LEDs t urn on.1Make sure t he VDSL Rout er is turned on. 2Make sure you are using t he power adapt or or cord included wit h the VDSL Rout er.3Make sure the power adaptor or cor d is connect ed to the VDSL Router and plugged in t o an appropriate power source. Make sure the power source is t urned on.4Turn t he VDSL Router off and on.5I f the problem  continues, contact  the vendor.One of the LEDs does not behave as expected.1Make sure you underst and the norm al behavior of t he LED. See Sect ion 1.5 on page 14.2Check the hardware connections.3I nspect your cables for dam age. Contact the vendor to replace any dam aged cables.4Turn t he VDSL Router off and on.
Chapter 24 TroubleshootingBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide2625I f the problem  continues, contact  the vendor.24.2  VDSL Router Access and LoginI  forgot  t he I P address for t he VDSL Router.1See t he cover page of t his guide for the default  LAN I P address.2I f you changed the I P address and have forgot ten it , you might get t he I P address of t he VDSL Router by looking up the I P address of t he default gat eway for your com puter. To do this in m ost  Windows com puters, click St a rt >  Run, enter cm d, and then enter  ipconfig. The I P address of the Defa ult  Gatew ay  m ight  be t he I P address of the VDSL Router  (it depends on t he net work), so ent er t his I P address in your I nt er net  browser.3I f this does not  work, you have t o reset  the device t o its fact ory default s. See Sect ion 1.7 on page 16.I  forgot  t he passw ord.1See t he back st icker for the default adm in password.2I f this does not  work, you have t o reset  the device t o its fact ory default s. See Sect ion 1.7 on page 16.I  cannot  see or access t he Login screen in t he web configurat or.1Make sure you are using t he correct  I P address.• See the cover  page of t his guide for t he default  I P address.• I f you changed the I P address (Sect ion 5.2 on page 106), use t he new  I P address.• I f you changed t he I P address and have forgot ten it , see the troubleshooting suggest ions for I  forgot t he I P address for the VDSL Rout er.2Check the hardware connections, and m ake sure t he LEDs ar e behaving as expect ed. See Sect ion 1.5 on page 14.3Make sure your I nt ernet browser does not block pop- up windows and has JavaScr ipt s and Java enabled. 4I f it  is possible t o log in from  another int erface, check the ser vice cont rol set t ings for HTTP and HTTPS ( M ain t en ance  >  Rem ot e  MGMT) .
 Chapter 24 TroubleshootingBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 2635Reset  the device t o its fact ory defaults, and t ry t o access the VDSL Router with t he default I P address. See Section 1.7 on page 16.6I f the problem  continues, contact  the netw ork adm inist rator or vendor, or try one of t he advanced suggest ions.Advance d Suggestions• Make sure you have logged out  of any earlier m anagem ent  sessions using t he sam e user account  even if they were through a different interface or using a different  browser.• Try to access the VDSL Rout er using another service, such as Telnet . I f you can access the VDSL Router, check the rem ote m anagem ent  set t ings and firewall rules to find out  why the VDSL Router does not  respond t o HTTP. I  can see t he Login screen, but  I  cannot log in to the VDSL Router.1Make sure you have entered the password correct ly. The field is case- sensitive, so m ake sure [ Caps Lock]  is not on. 2You cannot log in to t he web configurat or while som eone is using Telnet  t o access t he VDSL Router. Log out  of t he VDSL Router in the other session, or ask t he person who is logged in to log out. 3Turn t he VDSL Router off and on. 4I f this does not  work, you have t o reset  the device t o its fact ory defaults. See Section 24.1 on page 261.I  cannot  Telnet to t he VDSL Router.See t he t roubleshooting suggest ions for I  cannot see or access t he Login screen in the web configurator. I gnore the suggestions about  your browser.I  cannot use FTP to upload /  download t he configuration file. /  I  cannot  use FTP to upload new software.See t he t roubleshooting suggest ions for I  cannot see or access t he Login screen in the web configurator. I gnore the suggestions about  your browser.
Chapter 24 TroubleshootingBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide26424.3  Internet AccessI  cannot  access t he I nternet .1Check the hardware connections, and m ake sure t he LEDs ar e behaving as expect ed. See the Quick St a rt Guide and Sect ion 1.5 on page 14.2Make sure you ent ered your I SP account  inform ation correct ly in the Net w ork  Settin g >  Broadband screen. These fields are case- sensitive, so m ake sure [ Caps Lock]  is not  on. 3I f you are t rying to access t he I nt ernet  wirelessly, m ake sure t hat  you enabled the wireless LAN in the VDSL Router  and your wireless client and t hat  the wir eless set t ings in t he wireless client are t he sam e as t he sett ings in t he VDSL Router.4Disconnect  all the cables from your device and reconnect  them . 5I f the problem  continues, contact  your I SP. I  cannot  access t he I nternet  t hrough a DSL connect ion.1Make sure you have the D SL W AN port connect ed to a t elephone j ack (or t he DSL or m odem  jack on a split ter  if you have one).2Make sure you configured a proper DSL WAN int erface (N et w ork  Settin g >  Br oadband scr een)  with t he I nt ernet account inform ation prov ided by your I SP and that it  is enabled.3Check t hat  t he LAN inter face you are connected to is in t he sam e interface group as the DSL connect ion ( N et w ork  Se t t ing >  I nt erfa ce  Gr oup) .4I f you set up a WAN connect ion using bridging service, make sure you turn off the DHCP feat ure in the LAN  screen to have the client s get  WAN I P addresses direct ly from  your I SP’s DHCP server.I  cannot  connect  t o the I nternet  using a second DSL connect ion.ADSL and VDSL connect ions cannot work at t he sam e t im e. You can only use one type of DSL connect ion, either ADSL or VDSL connect ion at  one t ime.I  cannot  access t he I nt ernet anym ore. I  had access t o the I nt ernet (with t he VDSL Router), but m y I nternet connection is not available anym ore.1Your session with t he VDSL Router m ay have expired. Try logging into the VDSL Router again.
 Chapter 24 TroubleshootingBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 2652Check the hardware connections, and m ake sure t he LEDs ar e behaving as expect ed. See the Quick St a rt Guide and Sect ion 1.5 on page 14.3Turn t he VDSL Router off and on.4I f the problem  continues, contact  your I SP. 24.4  Wireless Internet AccessWhat fact ors m ay cause interm it t ent or unst abled wireless connection? How can I  solve t his problem ?The following factors m ay cause interference:• Obst acles:  walls, ceilings, furnit ure, and so on.• Building Materials:  m et al doors, alum inum  st uds.• Elect rical devices:  m icrowaves, m onit ors, electric m otors, cor dless phones, and ot her wireless devices.To optim ize the speed and quality of your wireless connect ion, you can:• Move your wireless device closer to the AP if t he signal st rengt h is low.• Reduce wireless inter ference t hat  m ay be caused by ot her wireless net works or surrounding wireless elect ronics such as cordless phones.• Place t he AP where there are m inim um  obst acles ( such as walls and ceilings)  bet ween t he AP and the wireless client . • Reduce t he num ber of wireless client s connect ing t o t he sam e AP sim ultaneously, or add addit ional APs if necessary.• Try closing som e program s t hat use t he I nter net, especially peer-to- peer applications. I f t he wireless client  is sending or receiving a lot  of inform ation, it may have t oo m any program s open that  use t he I nternet. What is a Server Set  I D (SSI D) ?An SSI D is a nam e t hat  uniquely ident ifies a wireless net work. The AP and all the client s within a wireless net work m ust  use the sam e SSI D.What wireless security m odes does m y VDSL Router support ?Wireless security is vital t o your net work. I t protect s com m unications bet ween wireless st ations, access points and the wired net work. Your VDSL Rout er provides t he following wireless securit y m odes:
Chapter 24 TroubleshootingBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide266•W PA: Wi-Fi Prot ect ed Access ( WPA)  is a subset of the I EEE 802.11i st andar d. I t  requires t he use of a RADI US server and is m ost ly used in business net works. •W PA- PSK: This has the device use either WPA- PSK or WPA2- PSK depending on which security m ode the wireless client  uses. •W PA2 : WPA2 ( I EEE 802.11i)  is a wireless security standard t hat  defines stronger encryption, aut hent icat ion and key m anagem ent  than WPA. I t requires the use of a RADI US server and is m ost ly used in business net works.•W PA2 - PSK: This uses a pre- shar ed key wit h the WPA2 st andard.•Mix e d W PA2 / W PA: This allows users t o connect  using either WPA2 or WPA.•Mix e d W PA2 / W PA - PSK: This allows users t o connect  using eit her WPA2- PSK or WPA- PSK.•W EP: Wir ed Equivalent  Privacy ( WEP) encrypt ion scram bles the dat a t ransm itted bet ween t he wireless st at ions and the access point s to keep net work comm unicat ions private.24.5  USB Device Connection The VDSL Router fails to detect m y USB device.1Disconnect  the USB device.2Reboot the VDSL Router.3I f you are connect ing a USB hard drive that com es with an external power supply, m ake sure it is connect ed to an appropriate power source that is on. 4Re-connect  your USB device t o t he VDSL Router.24.6  UPnPWhen using UPnP and t he VDSL Router reboots, m y com put er cannot detect UPnP and refresh M y N et w ork Places >  Loca l N e t w or k .1Disconnect  the Ethernet  cable from  the VDSL Router’s LAN port or from your com put er.2Re-connect  the Et her net  cable. The Local Area Connect ion icon for UPnP disappears in the screen.Restart  your com puter.
 Chapter 24 TroubleshootingBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 267I  cannot  open special applications such as white board, file t ransfer and video when I  use the MSN m essenger.1Wait m ore t han t hree m inutes.2Restart  t he applications.
Chapter 24 TroubleshootingBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide268
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 269APPENDIX   ALegal InformationCopyrightCopyright  ©  2012 by Zy XEL Com m unications Corporat ion.The cont ent s of t his publicat ion m ay not  be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, st ored in a ret rieval syst em , translat ed int o any language, or t ransm itt ed in any form  or by any m eans, electronic, m echanical, m agnet ic, opt ical, chem ical, photocopying, manual, or otherwise, without the prior writt en perm ission of ZyXEL Com m unicat ions Corporat ion.Published by ZyXEL Com m unications Corporat ion. All rights reserved.DisclaimerZyXEL does not assum e any liabilit y arising out  of t he application or use of any product s, or software described herein. Neither does it convey any license under it s pat ent  rights nor the patent right s of others. ZyXEL furt her reserves t he right  to m ake changes in any product s described herein without not ice. This publication is subj ect to change wit hout  not ice.Certifications Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Interference StatementThe device com plies with Part  15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject  t o t he following t wo condit ions:• This device m ay not cause harm ful interference.• This device m ust  accept  any int erference r eceived, including interference t hat  m ay cause undesired operat ions.This device has been t est ed and found to comply wit h the lim its for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part  15 of the FCC Rules. These lim its ar e designed t o provide reasonable prot ect ion against  harm ful interference in a residential inst allation. This device generates, uses, and can radiat e radio frequency energy, and if not inst alled and used in accordance wit h t he inst ruct ions, m ay cause harm ful interference to radio com m unications. However, t here is no guarantee that int erfer ence will not  occur in a part icular inst allat ion.I f this device does cause harm ful inter ference t o radio/ t elevision reception, which can be determ ined by turning t he device off and on, the user is encouraged to try t o correct  the int erference by one or m ore of t he following m easures:1Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.2I ncrease the separat ion between t he equipm ent  and t he receiver.
Appendix A Legal InformationBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide2703Connect  the equipm ent  int o an outlet  on a circuit  differ ent from  t hat  t o which the receiver is connect ed.4Consult  t he dealer or an experienced radio/ TV t echnician for help.FCC Radiation Exposure Statement• This t ransm itter m ust not  be co-located or operating in conj unct ion wit h any other ant enna or transm it ter. • I EEE 802.11b or 802.11g operation of this product in t he U.S.A. is software-lim ited to channels 1 through 11. • To com ply with FCC RF exposure com pliance requirem ents, a separation dist ance of at  least  20 cm  m ust be maintained between t he antenna of this device and all persons. 注意 !依據  低󰥈率電波輻射性電機管理辦法第十二條  經型式認證合格之低󰥈率射頻電機,非經許可,公司商號或使用者均不得擅自變更頻率󰥉大󰥈率或變更原設計之特性及󰥈能第十四條  低󰥈率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安󰠑及干擾合法通信;經發現有干擾現象時,應立即停用,並改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用前項合法通信,指依電信規定作業之無線電信低󰥈率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備之干擾 本機限在不干擾合法電臺與不受被干擾保障條件下於室󰠐使用 減少電磁波影響,請妥適使用 Notices Changes or  m odificat ions not expressly approved by the part y responsible for com pliance could void the user 's aut horit y to operat e t he equipment .This device has been designed for the WLAN 2.4 GHz net work t hroughout t he EC region and Switzerland, with rest rictions in France. Ce produit est  conçu pour les bandes de fréquences 2,4 GHz et/ ou 5 GHz conform ém ent à la législat ion Européenne. En France m ét ropolitaine, suivant les décisions n° 03- 908 et  03- 909 de l’ARCEP, la puissance d’ém ission ne devra pas dépasser 10 mW ( 10 dB)  dans le cadre d’une inst allation WiFi en extérieur pour les fréquences com prises ent re 2454 MHz et  2483,5 MHz.This Class B digit al apparat us com plies with Canadian I CES- 003.Cet  appareil num érique de la classe B est  conform e à la norm e NMB- 003 du Canada.
 Appendix A Legal InformationBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 271ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrant s t o t he original end user (purchaser) that t his product  is free from  any defect s in m aterial or workm anship for a specific period ( t he Warranty Period)  from  the dat e of purchase. The Warrant y Period varies by region. Check wit h your  vendor and/ or t he authorized ZyXEL local dist ribut or for det ails about  t he Warranty Period of t his product . During the war ranty per iod, and upon proof of pur chase, should the product have indications of failure due t o faulty workm anship and/ or m at erials, ZyXEL will, at  it s discretion, repair or  replace t he defect ive products or com ponent s without  charge for either part s or labor, and to what ever extent it shall deem  necessary to rest ore the product   or com ponents t o proper operating condition. Any replacem ent  will consist  of a new  or re- m anufact ured funct ionally equivalent product  of equal or higher value, and will be solely at t he discretion of ZyXEL. This warranty shall not apply if the product has been m odified, m isused, t am pered wit h, dam aged by an act  of God, or subj ect ed to abnorm al working conditions.NoteRepair or replacem ent , as provided under this warranty, is t he exclusive rem edy of the purchaser. This warrant y is in lieu of all ot her warranties, express or im plied, including any im plied warrant y of m er chantability or fitness for a part icular use or pur pose. Zy XEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequent ial dam ages of any kind to t he purchaser.To obtain t he ser vices of t his warrant y, cont act your vendor. You may also refer to the warrant y policy for the region in which you bought the device at htt p: / / www.zyxel.com/ web/support_warrant y_info.php.RegistrationRegist er your product  online t o r eceive e- m ail not ices of firm ware upgrades and inform at ion at  www.zyxel.com  for global product s, or at  www.us.zyxel.com for Nor th Am erican product s.Safety Warnings• Do NOT use this pr oduct  near wat er, for  exam ple, in a wet  basem ent or near  a swim ming pool.• Do NOT ex pose your dev ice to dam pness, dust  or cor rosive liquids.• Do NOT st ore t hings on t he device.• Avoid using this product  (ot her t han a cordless type)  during an electrical st or m . There may be a rem ot e risk of electric shock from lightnin g.• Do NOT inst all, use, or  service this dev ice du ring a t hunderst or m . There is a rem ote risk of elect r ic shock from  lightning.• Connect  ONLY suit able accessor ies to the dev ice.• Do NOT open t he dev ice or unit . Opening or r em ov ing covers can expose you t o dangerous high volt age points or other r isk s. ONLY qualified service personnel should ser vice or  disassem ble this device. Please contact  your vendor  for further  infor m at ion.• Make sure to connect  t he cables t o the correct  port s.• Place con necting cables car efully so that  no one will st ep on them  or  st um ble over  them.• Alway s disconnect  all t elephone lines from  t he wall outlet  before ser vicing or disassem bling this equipm ent.• Use ONLY an appropr iate power adaptor  or  cord for your device.• Connect  t he pow er adaptor or cor d t o the right  supply volt age (for exam ple, 110V AC in North Am er ica or  230V AC in Eur ope) .• Do NOT allow anyt hing to rest   on t he power adapt or or cord and do NOT place the product  where anyone can walk on t he pow er adapt or  or  cord.• Do NOT use the device if t he power adaptor or  cord is dam aged as it  m igh t  cause electrocution .• I f the pow er  adaptor  or  cor d is dam aged, rem ove it  fr om  t he device and the power source.• Do NOT attem pt t o repair t he power  adaptor  or  cord. Contact your local vendor  to order a new one.• Do not  use the device outside, and make sur e all the connect ions are indoors. Ther e may be a rem ote risk of electric shock from  lightnin g. • Do NOT obst r uct  the dev ice ventilation slot s, as insufficient airflow m ay harm  your device. • To redu ce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG ( Am er ican Wir e Gauge) or lar ger telecom m unicat ion  line cor d.• The RJ- 45 jacks are not  used for telephone line connection.• Antenna Warning!  This device meet s ETSI  and FCC certification r equirem ents when using t he included antenna( s) . Only use the included ant enna(s) . Your  produ ct  is m ar ked w it h this symbol, which is know n as the WEEE mark. WEEE st ands for  Wast e Elect r onics and Elect r ical Equipm ent. I t  m eans t hat  used elect r ical and elect r onic pr oduct s should not  be mixed wit h general wast e. Used elect r ical and elect ronic equipm ent should be treat ed separat ely.
Appendix A Legal InformationBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide272
 IndexBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 273IndexAACK m essage 226ACS 249act ivationm edia server 167adding a print er example 48applicationsm edia server 166act ivation 167iTunes server 166aut hent ication 188, 190RADI US server 190Aut o Configuration Server, see ACS 249Bbacking up configurat ion 241backup sett ings 241Basic Service Set, see BSSblinking LEDs 14broadcast 103BSS 191exam ple 191BYE request 226CCA 169call hist ory 219incom ing calls 220out going calls 219call hold 233, 234call service m ode 232, 234call transfer 233, 235call wait ing 233, 234Canonical Form at  I ndicat or See CFICBR ( Cont inuous Bit Rat e) 80CCMs 237certificat efact ory default 170certificat es 169aut hent icat ion 169CAcreat ing 170public key 169replacing 170st orage space 170Certificat ion Aut horit y 169Certificat ion Aut horit y. see CAcertificat ions 269not ices 270CFI 102CFM 237CCMs 237link trace t est 237loopback t est 237MA 237MD 237MEP 237MI P 237channel, wireless LAN 188Class of Service 230Class of Service, see CoSclient-server protocol 223com fort noise generat ion 229configurat ionbackup 241rest ore 241st atic route 141configurat ion backup 241Connectivity Check Messages, see CCMscopyright 269CoS 136, 230CoS t echnologies 128creat ing certificates 170CTS t hreshold 185, 188
IndexBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide274Ddat a fragm ent  t hreshold 185, 188default 242DHCP 106, 112different iated services 231Differentiated Services, see DiffServ 136DiffServ 136m arking rule 137DiffServ ( Differentiat ed Services) 230code points 230m arking rule 231digital I Ds 169disclaim er 269DLNA 166DNS 106, 112DNS server address assignm ent 103docum ent at ionrelat ed 2Dom ain Nam e 119Dom ain Nam e Syst em , see DNSDom ain Name Syst em . See DNS.DS field 136, 231DS, dee differentiated servicesDSCP 136, 231dynam ic DNS 145wildcard 146Dynam ic Host  Configuration Prot ocol, see DHCPDYNDNS wildcard 146EECHO 119echo cancellation 229Encapsulat ion 99MER 99PPP over Et hernet 99encapsulation 76RFC 1483 100encrypt ion 190Europe type call service m ode 232Ext ended Ser vice Set I Dentificat ion 179FFCC interference stat em ent 269File Sharing 162filtersMAC addr ess 183, 189Finger 119firewallenabling 121fir m ware 257version 62flash key 232flashing 232fragm ent at ion t hreshold 185, 188FTP 116, 119GG.168 229General wireless LAN screen 178HHTTP 119II EEE 802.1Q 102I GMP 103version 103I nt ernet  Prot ocol version 6 77I nt ernet  Service Provider, see I SPI P Address 118I P address 106, 113private 113WAN 76I P Address Assignm ent 102I P filt ercreat ing or edit ing rules 125int roduct ion 121I Pv6 77
 IndexBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 275addressing 77, 103prefix 77, 103prefix delegat ion 78prefix lengt h 77, 103I SP 76iTunes server 166I TU-T 229Kkey com binat ions 236keypad 236LLAN 105and USB print er 166DHCP 106, 112DNS 106, 112I P address 106, 109, 113MAC address 108subnet  m ask 106, 113LBR 237lim it at ionswireless LAN 191WPS 197link trace 237Link Trace Message, see LTMLink Trace Response, see LTRlist ening port 212logs 245Loop Back Response, see LBRloopback 237LTM 237LTR 237MMA 237MAC address 108, 183filter 183, 189MAC aut hent ication 183MAC filter 184Maintenance Associat ion, see MAMaintenance Dom ain, see MDMaintenance End Point, see MEPm anaging t he devicegood habits 13Maxim um  Burst  Size ( MBS) 80, 100MD 237m edia server 166act ivation 167iTunes server 166MEP 237MTU ( Multi-Tenant Unit) 102m ult icast 103m ult im edia 221m ult iplex ing 100LLC- based 100VC- based 100m ultiprot ocol encapsulation 100NNAT 115default server 118DMZ host 118port  num ber 116, 119services 119virtual servers 115NAT exam ple 119Network Address Translat ion, see NATnet work disconnect  icon 242Network Map 61NNTP 119non- proxy calls 217OOK response 226, 228ot her docum ent at ion 2
IndexBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide276PPBC 192Peak Cell Rat e ( PCR) 80, 100peer- t o-peer calls 217Per- Hop Behavior, see PHB 137PHB 137, 231phone bookspeed dial 217phone funct ions 236PI N, WPS 193exam ple 194Point-t o-Point Tunneling Prot ocol 119POP3 119port s 14PPP over Et hernet , see PPPoEPPPoE 76, 99Benefits 99PPTP 119pream ble 186, 188pream ble m ode 192prefix delegat ion 78Printer Server 165print er  shar ingand LAN 166requirem ent s 165private I P address 113product  registration 271prot ocol 76push butt on 17Push Button Configuration, see PBCpush butt on, WPS 192QQoS 127, 136, 230m arking 128setup 127tagging 128versus CoS 128Qualit y of Service, see QoSRRADI US server 190Real tim e Transport  Prot ocol, see RTPregist rat ionproduct 271relat ed docum entation 2rem ot e m anagem entTR- 069 249Rem ot e Procedure Calls, see RPCs 249reset 16rest ore configurat ion 241rest ore settings 241RFC 1058. See RI P.RFC 1389. See RI P.RFC 1483 100RFC 1631 115RFC 1889 225RFC 3164 245RI P 143Routing I nform ation Prot ocol. See RI PRPCs 249RTP 225RTS t hr eshold 185, 188Ssafet y warnings 271save set t ings 241securitywireless LAN 188Service Set 179Services 119Session I nitiation Prot ocol, see SI Psett ingsbackup 241rest ore 241setupst atic route 141silence suppr ession 228SI P 221account 221call progression 226
 IndexBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide 277client 223ident ities 221I NVI TE request 226, 227num ber 222OK response 228proxy server 223redirect  ser ver 224regist er server 225servers 223service dom ain 222URI 221user agent 223SI P ALG 119SMTP 119SNMP 119SNMP trap 119speed dial 217SSI D 189st atic route 139configuration 141exam ple 139st atic VLANst atusfirm ware version 62st atus indicat ors 14subnet  m ask 106, 113supplementary services 231Sust ain Cell Rate ( SCR) 80Sust ained Cell Rat e ( SCR) 100syslogprot ocol 245severit y  levels 245syst emfir m ware 257version 62reset 16t im e 253TTag Control I nform ation See TCITag Protocol I dentifier See TPI DTCIThe 76three- way conference 233, 235thresholdsdat a fragm ent 185, 188RTS/ CTS 185, 188t im e 253To S 230TPI D 102TR- 069 249ACS set up 249aut hent icat ion 250traffic shaping 100Type of Service, see ToSUunicast 103Uniform  Resource I dentifier 221Universal Plug and Play, see UPnPupgrading firm ware 257UPnP 151cautions 151exam ple 152inst allation 152NAT traversal 151USA type call service m ode 234VVAD 228VI DVirt ual Circuit  ( VC) 100Virt ual Local Area Network See VLANVLAN 102I ntroduct ion 102num ber of possible VI Dspriority fram est aticVLAN I D 102VLAN I dentifier See VI DVLAN t ag 102voice act ivit y det ect ion 228voice coding 228VoI P 221peer- t o-peer calls 217
IndexBasic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide278WWANWide Area Network, see WAN 75WAN int erface 67warranty 271not e 271WEP 190wireless LAN 177, 186aut hent ication 188, 190BSS 191exam ple 191channel 188encrypt ion 190exam ple 187fragm ent at ion t hreshold 185, 188lim it at ions 191MAC address filter 183, 189pream ble 186, 188RADI US server 190RTS/ CTS t hr eshold 185, 188security 188SSI D 189WEP 190WPA 190WPA- PSK 190WPS 192, 194exam ple 195lim it at ions 197PI N 193push butt on 17, 192Wireless t utorial 22WPA 190WPA- PSK 190WPS 192, 194exam ple 195lim it at ions 197PI N 193exam ple 194push butt on 17, 192

Navigation menu